快樂巴利palinanda.cc

清淨道論·隨念業處的解說 Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddeso

本經目錄八、隨念業處的解說死隨念論身至念論部分差別論入出息念論二百二十三、寂止隨念論如是,在為令善人愉悅而造的《清淨道論》中,於定的修習之部,名為〈隨念業處的解說〉的第八章[終]。

已對照

八、隨念業處的解說

8. Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddeso
已對照

死隨念論

Maraṇassatikathā
167緬 1.222已對照

一百六十七、如今,緊接在此之後的死隨念(maraṇassati)的修習解說已到來。此中,「死(maraṇaṃ)」者:即屬於一有的命根(jīvitindriya)之斷絕。而凡是諸阿羅漢被稱為輪轉之苦的斷絕的斷絕之死(samucchedamaraṇa),諸行被稱為剎那壞滅的剎那之死(khaṇikamaraṇa),以及在「樹死了」「金屬死了」等[說法]中的世俗之死(sammutimaraṇa),那[些]在此都不是所意指的。

167. Idāni ito anantarāya maraṇassatiyā bhāvanāniddeso anuppatto. Tattha maraṇanti ekabhavapariyāpannassa jīvitindriyassa upacchedo. Yaṃ panetaṃ arahantānaṃ vaṭṭadukkhasamucchedasaṅkhātaṃ samucchedamaraṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ khaṇikamaraṇaṃ, rukkho mato lohaṃ matantiādīsu sammutimaraṇañca, na taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.
已對照

而這所意指的[死],有時死(kālamaraṇa)與非時死(akālamaraṇa)兩種。此中,時死是由於福盡、或由於壽盡、或由於二者俱盡而有。非時死是依斷業(kammupacchedakakamma)之力而有。

Yampi cetaṃ adhippetaṃ, taṃ kālamaraṇaṃ akālamaraṇanti duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha kālamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayena vā āyukkhayena vā ubhayakkhayena vā hoti. Akālamaraṇaṃ kammupacchedakakammavasena.
已對照

此中,即使令壽命相續生起的諸緣仍然具足,僅僅由於令生結生之業的異熟已經成熟而有的死,這名為由福盡而死。由於缺乏趣、時、食物等的具足,猶如現今時代的人們那樣,依約一百歲之量的壽命已盡而有的死,這名為由壽盡而死。而猶如杜西魔(Dūsī māra)、迦藍浮王(Kalābu)等那樣,相續被那能當下就使[他們]從[所處之]位墜落的業所截斷者的死,或者依前業之力,相續正被持刀[殺害]等加害所截斷者的死,這名為非時死。這一切都攝在前述的命根之斷絕中。如是,對被稱為命根之斷絕的死的憶念,[即]死隨念。

Tattha yaṃ vijjamānāyapi āyusantānajanakapaccayasampattiyā kevalaṃ paṭisandhijanakassa kammassa vipakkavipākattā maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ puññakkhayena maraṇaṃ nāma. Yaṃ gatikālāhārādisampattiyā abhāvena ajjatanakālapurisānaṃ viya vassasatamattaparimāṇassa āyuno khayavasena maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ āyukkhayena maraṇaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana dūsīmārakalāburājādīnaṃ viya taṅkhaṇaññeva ṭhānācāvanasamatthena kammunā upacchinnasantānānaṃ, purimakammavasena vā satthaharaṇādīhi upakkamehi upacchijjamānasantānānaṃ maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ akālamaraṇaṃ nāma. Taṃ sabbampi vuttappakārena jīvitindriyupacchedena saṅgahitaṃ. Iti jīvitindriyupacchedasaṅkhātassa maraṇassa saraṇaṃ maraṇassati.
168緬 1.223已對照

一百六十八、欲修習它者,應獨處、宴默,以「死將會到來,命根將會斷絕」,或以「死、死」[這樣]轉起如理作意。因為對不如理地轉起[作意]者,在隨念可愛之人的死時生起愁,猶如生母隨念愛子之死時那樣;在隨念不可愛之人的死時生起愉悅,猶如怨敵們隨念[其]怨敵之死時那樣;在隨念中立之人的死時不生起悚懼,猶如焚屍人見到屍體時那樣;在隨念自己的死時生起驚恐,猶如生性膽怯的人見到舉刀的殺戮者時那樣。這一切都是由於缺乏念、悚懼與智而有。所以,應在各處看見被殺、已死的眾生,轉向那些曾見過[其]成就的眾生已死之死,結合念、悚懼與智,以「死將會到來」等方式轉起作意。因為如是轉起者,是如理地轉起——以方便轉起,此是其義。因為唯有如是轉起者,對某些人而言,諸蓋便被鎮伏,以死為所緣的念便安住,業處便達到近行。

168. Taṃ bhāvetukāmena rahogatena paṭisallīnena ‘‘maraṇaṃ bhavissati, jīvitindriyaṃ upacchijjissatī’’ti vā, ‘‘maraṇaṃ maraṇa’’nti vā yoniso manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ayoniso pavattayato hi iṭṭhajanamaraṇānussaraṇe soko uppajjati vijātamātuyā piyaputtamaraṇānussaraṇe viya. Aniṭṭhajanamaraṇānussaraṇe pāmojjaṃ uppajjati verīnaṃ verimaraṇānussaraṇe viya. Majjhattajanamaraṇānussaraṇe saṃvego na uppajjati matakaḷevaradassane chavaḍāhakassa viya. Attano maraṇānussaraṇe santāso uppajjati ukkhittāsikaṃ vadhakaṃ disvā bhīrukajātikassa viya. Tadetaṃ sabbampi satisaṃvegañāṇavirahato hoti. Tasmā tattha tattha hatamatasatte oloketvā diṭṭhapubbasampattīnaṃ sattānaṃ matānaṃ maraṇaṃ āvajjetvā satiñca saṃvegañca ñāṇañca yojetvā ‘‘maraṇaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādinā nayena manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evaṃ pavattento hi yoniso pavatteti, upāyena pavattetīti attho. Evaṃ pavattayatoyeva hi ekaccassa nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanti, maraṇārammaṇā sati saṇṭhāti, upacārappattameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti.
169已對照

一百六十九、而凡僅此還不能[達到]者,應以這八種行相隨念死:依如殺戮者現前,依成就與失壞,依比照,依身為眾多所共,依壽命羸弱,依無定相,依時分的限定,依剎那短促。

169. Yassa pana ettāvatā na hoti, tena vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato, sampattivipattito, upasaṃharaṇato, kāyabahusādhāraṇato, āyudubbalato, animittato, addhānaparicchedato, khaṇaparittatoti imehi aṭṭhahākārehi maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
已對照

此中,「依如殺戮者現前(vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato)」者:即依猶如殺戮者那樣的現前。因為猶如殺戮者[心想]「我要砍下這人的頭」,拿起刀,在[他的]頸上揮動,就已現前;同樣,死也已現前——應如是隨念。為什麼呢?由於與生俱來,又由於奪取生命。因為猶如菌蕈的芽苞頂著泥土而長出,同樣,眾生帶著老死而生。因為他們的結生心在生起之後緊接著就達到老,與相應諸蘊一起破壞,猶如從山頂墜落的岩石[碎裂]那樣。如是,首先剎那之死是與生俱來的。而由於已生者必定會死,此處所意指的死也是與生俱來的。所以,這眾生從出生之時起,猶如升起的太陽只是朝著沒落而行,從已走過之處絲毫不退回;又猶如從山中流下、流速湍急、沖走一切的河流,只是流淌、只是奔流,絲毫不退回;同樣,[這眾生]絲毫不退回,只是朝著死而行。因此說——

Tattha vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānatoti vadhakassa viya paccupaṭṭhānato. Yathā hi imassa sīsaṃ chindissāmīti asiṃ gahetvā gīvāya cārayamāno vadhako paccupaṭṭhitova hoti, evaṃ maraṇampi paccupaṭṭhitamevāti anussaritabbaṃ. Kasmā? Saha jātiyā āgatato, jīvitaharaṇato ca. Yathā hi ahicchattakamakuḷaṃ matthakena paṃsuṃ gahetvāva uggacchati, evaṃ sattā jarāmaraṇaṃ gahetvāva nibbattanti. Tathā hi nesaṃ paṭisandhicittaṃ uppādānantarameva jaraṃ patvā pabbatasikharato patitasilā viya bhijjati saddhiṃ sampayuttakhandhehi. Evaṃ khaṇikamaraṇaṃ tāva saha jātiyā āgataṃ. Jātassa pana avassaṃ maraṇato idhādhippetamaraṇampi saha jātiyā āgataṃ. Tasmā esa satto jātakālato paṭṭhāya yathā nāma uṭṭhito sūriyo atthābhimukho gacchateva, gatagataṭṭhānato īsakampi na nivattati. Yathā vā nadī pabbateyyā sīghasotā hārahārinī sandateva vattateva īsakampi na nivattati, evaṃ īsakampi anivattamāno maraṇābhimukhova yāti. Tena vuttaṃ –
已對照

「人於最初的一夜,便住於胎中,

‘‘Yamekarattiṃ paṭhamaṃ, gabbhe vasati māṇavo;
已對照

他既已起程而行,行去便不再回返。」(《本生》1.15.363)

Abbhuṭṭhitova so yāti, sa gacchaṃ na nivattatī’’ti. (jā. 1.15.363);
緬 1.224已對照

而對如是行進的他來說,死正是臨近的,猶如被夏日炙烤的小河的乾涸,猶如清晨果柄被汁液浸潤的樹果的墜落,猶如被槌擊打的陶器的破碎,猶如被日光照觸的露珠的消散。所以說——

Evaṃ gacchato cassa gimhābhitattānaṃ kunnadīnaṃ khayo viya, pāto āporasānugatabandhanānaṃ dumapphalānaṃ patanaṃ viya, muggarābhitāḷitānaṃ mattikabhājanānaṃ bhedo viya, sūriyarasmisamphuṭṭhānaṃ ussāvabindūnaṃ viddhaṃsanaṃ viya ca maraṇameva āsannaṃ hoti. Tenāha –
已對照

「晝夜在流逝,命在止息;

‘‘Accayanti ahorattā, jīvitamuparujjhati;
已對照

有死者的壽命耗盡,如小河之水。(《相應部》1.146)

Āyu khīyati maccānaṃ, kunnadīnaṃva odakaṃ. (saṃ. ni. 1.146);
已對照

「猶如成熟的諸果,清晨就有墜落的怖畏;

‘‘Phalānamiva pakkānaṃ, pāto papatato bhayaṃ;
已對照

如是已生的有死者,恆常有死亡的怖畏。

Evaṃ jātāna maccānaṃ, niccaṃ maraṇato bhayaṃ.
已對照

「猶如陶師所造的陶器,

‘‘Yathāpi kumbhakārassa, kataṃ mattikabhājanaṃ;
已對照

小的與大的,已燒成的與未燒的,

Khuddakañca mahantañca, yaṃ pakkaṃ yañca āmakaṃ;
已對照

一切都以破碎為終結;有死者的生命也是如此。」(《經集》581-582)

Sabbaṃ bhedanapariyantaṃ, evaṃ maccāna jīvitaṃ’. (su. ni. 581-582);
已對照

「猶如草尖上的露珠,一到日出[便消失];

‘‘Ussāvova tiṇaggamhi, sūriyuggamanaṃ pati;
已對照

人們的壽命也是如此——母親,請不要阻攔我。」(《本生》1.11.79)

Evamāyu manussānaṃ, mā maṃ amma nivārayā’’ti. (jā. 1.11.79);
已對照

如是,這猶如舉刀的殺戮者那樣與生俱來的死,猶如那在頸上揮動刀的殺戮者那樣,必定奪取生命,不奪取就不退回。所以,由於與生俱來,又由於奪取生命,死也猶如舉刀的殺戮者那樣已現前——應如是依如殺戮者現前而隨念死。

Evaṃ ukkhittāsiko vadhako viya saha jātiyā āgataṃ panetaṃ maraṇaṃ gīvāya asiṃ cārayamāno so vadhako viya jīvitaṃ haratiyeva, na aharitvā nivattati. Tasmā saha jātiyā āgatato, jīvitaharaṇato ca ukkhittāsiko vadhako viya maraṇampi paccupaṭṭhitamevāti evaṃ vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
170已對照

一百七十、「依成就與失壞(sampattivipattito)」者:在此[世間],所謂成就,只在失壞尚未壓倒它時才光彩;而沒有任何所謂成就能越過失壞而住立。正是如此——

170. Sampattivipattitoti idha sampatti nāma tāvadeva sobhati, yāva naṃ vipatti nābhibhavati, na ca sā sampatti nāma atthi, yā vipattiṃ atikkamma tiṭṭheyya. Tathā hi –
已對照

「享有了整個大地,施與了百俱胝,曾經安樂的[那位王],

‘‘Sakalaṃ mediniṃ bhutvā, datvā koṭisataṃ sukhī;
已對照

到最後,他所自在的只剩下半個餘甘子。

Aḍḍhāmalakamattassa, ante issarataṃ gato.
已對照

「就以那同一個身軀,當福德已趨於盡時,

‘‘Teneva dehabandhena, puññamhi khayamāgate;
已對照

面向死亡,那位阿育(Asoka)[大王]也陷入了憂(soka)。」

Maraṇābhimukho sopi, asoko sokamāgato’’ti.
緬 1.225已對照

再者,一切健康都以病為終結,一切青春都以老為終結,一切生命都以死為終結;一切世間群居之眾都被生所隨逐,被老所侵入,被病所壓倒,被死所擊打。所以[世尊]說——

Apica sabbaṃ ārogyaṃ byādhipariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ yobbanaṃ jarāpariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ jīvitaṃ maraṇapariyosānaṃ, sabboyeva lokasannivāso jātiyā anugato, jarāya anusaṭo, byādhinā abhibhūto, maraṇena abbhāhato. Tenāha –
已對照

「猶如廣大的岩石之山,觸及天空,

‘‘Yathāpi selā vipulā, nabhaṃ āhacca pabbatā;
已對照

從四周合圍而來,碾壓著四方。

Samantā anupariyeyyuṃ, nippothentā catuddisā.
已對照

「同樣,衰老與死壓向諸生類——

‘‘Evaṃ jarā ca maccu ca, adhivattanti pāṇine;
已對照

剎帝利、婆羅門、吠舍,首陀羅、旃陀羅、補羯娑;

Khattiye brāhmaṇe vesse, sudde caṇḍālapukkuse;
已對照

無所放過,一切盡皆碾碎。

Na kiñci parivajjeti, sabbamevābhimaddati.
已對照

「在那裡,象沒有[用武之]地,車與步兵也沒有;

‘‘Na tattha hatthīnaṃ bhūmi, na rathānaṃ na pattiyā;
已對照

也不能以咒術之戰,或以財而戰勝。」(《相應部》1.136)

Na cāpi mantayuddhena, sakkā jetuṃ dhanena vā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.136);
已對照

應如是辨定生命的成就以死的失壞為終結,依成就與失壞而隨念死。

Evaṃ jīvitasampattiyā maraṇavipattipariyosānataṃ vavatthapentena sampattivipattito maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
171緬 1.226已對照

一百七十一、「依比照(upasaṃharaṇato)」者:即依把自己與他人相比照。此中,應以七種行相依比照而隨念死:依名聲之廣大,依福德之廣大,依勢力之廣大,依神通之廣大,依慧之廣大,依獨覺佛,依正等正覺者。怎樣[比照]呢?這名為死的,就連對名聲廣大、隨從眾多、財富與車乘具足的大三摩多(Mahāsammata)、曼達多王(Mandhātu)、大善見王(Mahāsudassana)、堅固念王(Daḷhanemi)、尼彌王(Nimi)等,也毫無顧忌地落到了[他們]上面;何況我,它怎會不落到我上面呢?

名聲廣大的諸位勝王,大三摩多等,

他們也落入了死神的掌控,像我這樣的人還用說嗎?

應如是首先依名聲之廣大而隨念。

怎樣依福德之廣大[而隨念]呢?

樹提(Jotika)、闍提羅(Jaṭila)、鬱伽(Ugga),美達迦(Meṇḍaka),還有富樓那迦(Puṇṇaka);

這些以及其他在世間以大福德者聞名的人,

全都趣入了死,像我這樣的人還用說嗎?

應如是依福德之廣大而隨念。

怎樣依勢力之廣大[而隨念]呢?

婆藪提婆(Vāsudeva)、婆羅提婆(Baladeva),毗摩舍那(Bhīmasena)、瑜底提羅(Yudhiṭṭhila),

以及那位大力士遮努羅(Cānura),都落入了終結者的掌控。

他們是如此具足體力與勢力,如是在世間聞名;

他們也走向了死,像我這樣的人還用說嗎?

應如是依勢力之廣大而隨念。

怎樣依神通之廣大[而隨念]呢?

他僅以腳拇指,就震動了最勝殿(Vejayanta);

他是有神通者之中最勝的,是第二位上首弟子。

就連他,也猶如鹿[進入]獅子之口那樣,

連同[他的]諸神通,進入了可怖的死神之口,像我這樣的人還用說嗎?

應如是依神通之廣大而隨念。

怎樣依慧之廣大[而隨念]呢?

除了世間怙主之外,其餘凡有的諸生類,

在慧上都抵不上舍利弗的十六分之一。

這樣一位大慧者、第一位上首弟子,

也落入了死的掌控,像我這樣的人還用說嗎?

應如是依慧之廣大而隨念。

怎樣依獨覺佛而[隨念]呢?就連那些憑著自己智與精進之力摧毀了一切煩惱之敵、證得獨覺菩提、猶如犀角般的自生者(sayambhū),他們也未脫離死;我又怎能脫離呢?

依憑種種[事]相,審察[諸法]的諸大仙,

以自生智的威力,證得了諸漏的滅盡;

他們依獨行獨住,猶如犀角,

他們也未能超越死神,像我這樣的人還用說嗎?

應如是依獨覺佛而隨念。

怎樣依正等正覺者而[隨念]呢?就連那位世尊——[他]色身以八十隨好所莊嚴的三十二大丈夫相而絢爛,法身以一切行相清淨的戒蘊等功德之寶而豐盛,於名聲之廣大、福德之廣大、勢力之廣大、神通之廣大、慧之廣大[五者]都已到達彼岸,是無等者、無等等者、無可比擬者、阿羅漢、正等正覺者——他也猶如大火聚被降落的雨水[熄滅]那樣,被降落的死之雨當下就熄滅了。

對於有如此大威力的大仙,

這死也不因畏懼、不因羞愧而順服於[他];

這無羞恥、無怯懦、踐踏一切眾生的[死],

對像我這樣的眾生,怎會不征服呢?

應如是依正等正覺者而隨念。

當他如是由於同樣有死,把自己與那些具足名聲之廣大等的他人相比照,[想]「我也會像那些殊勝的眾生一樣死去」而隨念時,業處便達到近行。應如是依比照而隨念死。

171. Upasaṃharaṇatoti parehi saddhiṃ attano upasaṃharaṇato. Tattha sattahākārehi upasaṃharaṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ, yasamahattato, puññamahattato, thāmamahattato, iddhimahattato, paññāmahattato, paccekabuddhato, sammāsambuddhatoti. Kathaṃ? Idaṃ maraṇaṃ nāma mahāyasānaṃ mahāparivārānaṃ sampannadhanavāhanānaṃ mahāsammatamandhātumahāsudassana daḷhanemi nimippabhutīnampi upari nirāsaṅkameva patitaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayhaṃ upari na patissati?
Mahāyasā rājavarā, mahāsammataādayo;
Tepi maccuvasaṃ pattā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ tāva yasamahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ puññamahattato?
Jotiko jaṭilo uggo, meṇḍako atha puṇṇako;
Ete caññe ca ye loke, mahāpuññāti vissutā;
Sabbe maraṇamāpannā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ puññamahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ thāmamahattato?
Vāsudevo baladevo, bhīmaseno yudhiṭṭhilo;
Cānuro yo mahāmallo, antakassa vasaṃ gatā.
Evaṃ thāmabalūpetā, iti lokamhi vissutā;
Etepi maraṇaṃ yātā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ thāmamahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ iddhimahattato?
Pādaṅguṭṭhakamattena, vejayantamakampayi;
Yo nāmiddhimataṃ seṭṭho, dutiyo aggasāvako.
Sopi maccumukhaṃ ghoraṃ, migo sīhamukhaṃ viya;
Paviṭṭho saha iddhīhi, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ iddhimahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ paññāmahattato?
Lokanāthaṃ ṭhapetvāna, ye caññe atthi pāṇino;
Paññāya sāriputtassa, kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasiṃ.
Evaṃ nāma mahāpañño, paṭhamo aggasāvako;
Maraṇassa vasaṃ patto, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ paññāmahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ paccekabuddhato? Yepi te attano ñāṇavīriyabalena sabbakilesasattunimmathanaṃ katvā paccekabodhiṃ pattā khaggavisāṇakappā sayambhuno, tepi maraṇato na muttā, kuto panāhaṃ muccissāmīti.
Taṃ taṃ nimittamāgamma, vīmaṃsantā mahesayo;
Sayambhuññāṇatejena, ye pattā āsavakkhayaṃ.
Ekacariyanivāsena, khaggasiṅgasamūpamā;
Tepi nātigatā maccuṃ, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ paccekabuddhato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ sammāsambuddhato? Yopi so bhagavā asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitadvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇavicitrarūpakāyo sabbākāraparisuddhasīlakkhandhādiguṇaratanasamiddhadhammakāyo yasamahattapuññamahattathāmamahattaiddhimahattapaññāmahattānaṃ pāraṃ gato asamo asamasamo appaṭipuggalo arahaṃ sammāsambuddho, sopi salilavuṭṭhinipātena mahāaggikkhandho viya maraṇavuṭṭhinipātena ṭhānaso vūpasanto.
Evaṃ mahānubhāvassa, yaṃ nāmetaṃ mahesino;
Na bhayena na lajjāya, maraṇaṃ vasamāgataṃ.
Nillajjaṃ vītasārajjaṃ, sabbasattābhimaddanaṃ;
Tayidaṃ mādisaṃ sattaṃ, kathaṃ nābhibhavissatīti.
Evaṃ sammāsambuddhato anussaritabbaṃ.
Tassevaṃ yasamahattatādisampannehi parehi saddhiṃ maraṇasāmaññatāya attānaṃ upasaṃharitvā tesaṃ viya sattavisesānaṃ mayhampi maraṇaṃ bhavissatīti anussarato upacārappattaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti. Evaṃ upasaṃharaṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
172已對照

一百七十二、「依身為眾多所共(kāyabahusādhāraṇato)」者:這身是為眾多所共的。首先,它為八十種蟲類所共有:此中,依附於表皮的生類啃食表皮,依附於皮的啃食皮,依附於肉的啃食肉,依附於腱的啃食腱,依附於骨的啃食骨,依附於骨髓的啃食骨髓。它們就在那裡出生、衰老、死去,排洩大小便。身體就是它們的產房、病房、墳場、廁所與尿槽。這身也會由於那些蟲類的擾動而趨向死亡。而猶如為八十種蟲類所共有,同樣,它也為內在的數百種病,以及外在的蛇、蠍等死亡之緣所共有。

172. Kāyabahusādhāraṇatoti ayaṃ kāyo bahusādhāraṇo. Asītiyā tāva kimikulānaṃ sādhāraṇo, tattha chavinissitā pāṇā chaviṃ khādanti, cammanissitā cammaṃ khādanti, maṃsanissitā maṃsaṃ khādanti, nhārunissitā nhāruṃ khādanti, aṭṭhinissitā aṭṭhiṃ khādanti, miñjanissitā miñjaṃ khādanti. Tattheva jāyanti jīyanti mīyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti. Kāyova nesaṃ sūtigharañceva gilānasālā ca susānañca vaccakuṭi ca passāvadoṇikā ca. Svāyaṃ tesampi kimikulānaṃ pakopena maraṇaṃ nigacchatiyeva. Yathā ca asītiyā kimikulānaṃ, evaṃ ajjhattikānaṃyeva anekasatānaṃ rogānaṃ bāhirānañca ahivicchikādīnaṃ maraṇassa paccayānaṃ sādhāraṇo.
緬 1.228已對照

因為猶如在四衢大道上豎立的靶子,從一切方向來的箭、槍、矛、石塊等都落在[它上面];同樣,一切禍患也都落在身上。這身也會由於那些禍患的降落而趨向死亡。所以世尊說:「諸比丘,在此,比丘在白天已過、夜晚來臨時,這樣省察:『我的死緣確實很多:或蛇咬我,或蠍螫我,或蜈蚣咬我,我便會因此命終,那對我就是障礙;或我會絆倒跌下,或我吃下的飯會[在體內]敗壞,或我的膽汁會擾動,或我的痰會擾動,或我那如刀割的諸風會擾動,我便會因此命終,那對我就是障礙。』」(《增支部》6.20)應如是依身為眾多所共而隨念死。

Yathā hi catumahāpathe ṭhapite lakkhamhi sabbadisāhi āgatā sarasattitomarapāsāṇādayo nipatanti, evaṃ kāyepi sabbupaddavā nipatanti. Svāyaṃ tesampi upaddavānaṃ nipātena maraṇaṃ nigacchatiyeva. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu divase nikkhante rattiyā paṭihitāya iti paṭisañcikkhati, bahukā kho me paccayā maraṇassa, ahi vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, vicchiko vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, satapadī vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, tena me assa kālaṅkiriyā, so mamassa antarāyo, upakkhalitvā vā papateyyaṃ, bhattaṃ vā me bhuttaṃ byāpajjeyya, pittaṃ vā me kuppeyya, semhaṃ vā me kuppeyya, satthakā vā me vātā kuppeyyuṃ, tena me assa kālaṅkiriyā, so mamassa antarāyo’’ti. Evaṃ (a. ni. 6.20) kāyabahusādhāraṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
173已對照

一百七十三、「依壽命羸弱(āyudubbalato)」者:這所謂壽命是無力的、羸弱的。正是如此,眾生的生命繫於入出息,繫於威儀,繫於冷熱,繫於大種,也繫於食。它唯有得到入出息的均等運行才轉起;而當向外呼出的鼻風不進入內裡,或進入的不呼出時,便名為已死。它也唯有得到四威儀的均等運行才轉起;而由於其中任一種的過度,諸壽行便被截斷。它也唯有得到冷熱的均等運行才轉起;而被極冷或極熱所壓倒者,[生命]便敗壞。它也唯有得到諸大種的均等運行才轉起;而由於地界或水界等其中任一種的擾動,即使是具足力量的人,也會身體僵硬,或由於腹瀉等而身體溼爛腐臭,或被大熱所纏,或關節的連結碎裂,[於是]達到生命之盡。生命也唯有對在適當時候得到段食者才轉起;而對得不到食物者,便趨於遍盡。應如是依壽命羸弱而隨念死。

173. Āyudubbalatoti āyu nāmetaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ. Tathā hi sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ assāsapassāsūpanibaddhañceva iriyāpathūpanibaddhañca sītuṇhūpanibaddhañca mahābhūtūpanibaddhañca āhārūpanibaddhañca. Tadetaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Bahi nikkhantanāsikavāte pana anto apavisante, paviṭṭhe vā anikkhamante mato nāma hoti. Catunnaṃ iriyāpathānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Aññataraññatarassa pana adhimattatāya āyusaṅkhārā upacchijjanti. Sītuṇhānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Atisītena pana atiuṇhena vā abhibhūtassa vipajjati. Mahābhūtānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Pathavīdhātuyā pana āpodhātuādīnaṃ vā aññataraññatarassa pakopena balasampannopi puggalo patthaddhakāyo vā atisārādivasena kilinnapūtikāyo vā mahāḍāhapareto vā sambhijjamānasandhibandhano vā hutvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kabaḷīkārāhārampi yuttakāle labhantasseva jīvitaṃ pavattati, āhāraṃ alabhamānassa pana parikkhayaṃ gacchatīti. Evaṃ āyudubbalato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
174已對照

一百七十四、「依無定相(animittato)」者:依無確定,依無限定——此是其義。因為眾生的——

174. Animittatoti avavatthānato, paricchedābhāvatoti attho. Sattānaṃ hi –
已對照

生命、病與時,捨身之處與去處;

Jīvitaṃ byādhi kālo ca, dehanikkhepanaṃ gati;
已對照

這五者在生命世間是無定相的,不可得知。

Pañcete jīvalokasmiṃ, animittā na nāyare.
緬 1.229已對照

此中,首先生命,由於不能確定「只應活這麼久,不超過這個」,故是無定相的。因為眾生在凝滑時也會死,在胞結、閉屍、堅厚、一個月、兩個月、三個月、四個月、五個月、十個月時也會死,在出胎之時也會死;此後,在百歲之內或之外,都一樣會死。病,由於不能確定「眾生只會因這種病而死,不會因別的」,故也是無定相的。因為眾生會因眼病而死,也會因耳病等其中任何一種而死。時,由於不能如是確定「只應在這個時候死,不在別的時候」,故也是無定相的。因為眾生會在上午死,也會在中午等其中任何一個時候死。捨身之處,由於不能如是確定「死者的身體只應倒在這裡,不在別處」,故也是無定相的。因為生在村內的人,自體也會倒在村外;生在村外的人,也會倒在村內。同樣,陸生者[會倒]在水中,水生者[會倒]在陸上——應如是以多種方式詳說。去處,由於不能如是確定「從這裡死去者應投生於這裡」,故也是無定相的。因為從天界死去的,也會投生於人間;從人界死去的,也會投生於天界等任何一處——如是世間猶如套在機關上的牛那樣,在五趣中輪轉——應如是依無定相而隨念死。

Tattha jīvitaṃ tāva ‘‘ettakameva jīvitabbaṃ, na ito para’’nti vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Kalalakālepi hi sattā maranti, abbudapesighanamāsikadvemāsatemāsacatumāsapañcamāsadasamāsakālepi. Kucchito nikkhantasamayepi. Tato paraṃ vassasatassa antopi bahipi marantiyeva. Byādhipi ‘‘imināva byādhinā sattā maranti, nāññenā’’ti vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Cakkhurogenāpi hi sattā maranti, sotarogādīnaṃ aññatarenāpi. Kālopi ‘‘imasmiṃyeva kāle maritabbaṃ, nāññasmi’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Pubbaṇhepi hi sattā maranti, majjhanhikādīnaṃ aññatarasmimpi. Dehanikkhepanampi ‘‘idheva mīyamānānaṃ dehena patitabbaṃ, nāññatrā’’ti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Antogāme jātānaṃ hi bahigāmepi attabhāvo patati. Bahigāme jātānampi antogāme. Tathā thalajānaṃ vā jale, jalajānaṃ vā thaleti anekappakārato vitthāretabbaṃ. Gatipi ‘‘ito cutena idha nibbattitabba’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittā. Devalokato hi cutā manussesupi nibbattanti, manussalokato cutā devalokādīnampi yattha katthaci nibbattantīti evaṃ yantayuttagoṇo viya gatipañcake loko samparivattatīti evaṃ animittato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
175已對照

一百七十五、「依時分的限定(addhānaparicchedato)」者:人們的生命之時分,如今是短促的。凡長壽者,[也只活]一百年,或稍多一點。所以世尊說:「諸比丘,人的壽命是短少的。來世是必去的,應當作善,應當行梵行。已生者沒有不死的。諸比丘,凡長壽者,[也只活]一百年,或稍多一點。

175. Addhānaparicchedatoti manussānaṃ jīvitassa nāma etarahi paritto addhā. Yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ, appaṃ vā bhiyyo. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘appamidaṃ, bhikkhave, manussānaṃ āyu, gamanīyo samparāyo, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ, caritabbaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, natthi jātassa amaraṇaṃ. Yo, bhikkhave, ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ, appaṃ vā bhiyyoti.
已對照

人的壽命是短的,善人應輕視它;

Appamāyumanussānaṃ, hīḷeyya naṃ suporiso;
已對照

應如頭上著火者一般而行,沒有死不來的。」(《相應部》1.145)

Careyyādittasīsova, natthi maccussa nāgamoti. (saṃ. ni. 1.145);
已對照

[世尊]又說:「諸比丘,從前有一位名叫阿羅迦(Araka)的導師」——應詳說那以七個譬喻所莊嚴的整部經。

Aparampi āha – ‘‘bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, arako nāma satthā ahosī’’ti sabbampi sattahi upamāhi alaṅkataṃ suttaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
緬 1.230已對照

[世尊]又說:「諸比丘,凡有比丘這樣修習死隨念:『啊,願我活一晝夜,作意世尊的教法,我所作的確實就多了。』諸比丘,凡有比丘這樣修習死隨念:『啊,願我活一白天,作意世尊的教法,我所作的確實就多了。』諸比丘,凡有比丘這樣修習死隨念:『啊,願我活到我吃完一頓團食那麼久,作意世尊的教法,我所作的確實就多了。』諸比丘,凡有比丘這樣修習死隨念:『啊,願我活到我嚼了四五口飯嚥下那麼久,作意世尊的教法,我所作的確實就多了。』諸比丘,這些比丘被稱為放逸而住、為諸漏的滅盡而遲緩地修習死隨唸的。諸比丘,而凡有比丘這樣修習死隨念:『啊,願我活到我嚼了一口飯嚥下那麼久,作意世尊的教法,我所作的確實就多了。』諸比丘,凡有比丘這樣修習死隨念:『啊,願我活到我入息之後出息、或出息之後入息那麼久,作意世尊的教法,我所作的確實就多了。』諸比丘,這些比丘被稱為不放逸而住、為諸漏的滅盡而銳利地修習死隨唸的。」(《增支部》6.19)如是,生命的時分是短促的,[只有]僅嚼四五口飯之量,不可信賴——應如是依時分的限定而隨念死。

Aparampi āha – ‘‘yocāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ rattindivaṃ jīveyyaṃ, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yocāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ divasaṃ jīveyyaṃ, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ ekaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ cattāro pañca ālope saṅkhāditvā ajjhoharāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, bhikkhū pamattā viharanti, dandhaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāventi āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yo ca khvāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ ekaṃ ālopaṃ saṅkhāditvā ajjhoharāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ assasitvā vā passasāmi, passasitvā vā assasāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, bhikkhū appamattā viharanti, tikkhaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāventi āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti (a. ni. 6.19). Evaṃ catupañcālopasaṅkhādanamattaṃ avissāsiyo paritto jīvitassa addhāti evaṃ addhānaparicchedato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
176緬 1.231已對照

一百七十六、「依剎那短促(khaṇaparittato)」者:因為從勝義上說,眾生的生命剎那極為短促,僅是一心之轉起而已。猶如車輪轉動時也只以輪輞的一點而轉,靜止時也只以一[點]而止;正是這樣,眾生的生命只是一心剎那,那心一滅,便說眾生已滅。即如所說:「於過去心剎那曾活,[今]不活,亦不將活;於未來心剎那不曾活,[今]不活,將活;於現在心剎那不曾活,[今]正活,亦不將活。

「生命、自體,以及純然的苦樂,

[皆]系屬於一心,那剎那輕捷地流轉。

「凡於此處,於正死者或正存續者[身中]已滅去的,

一切諸蘊皆同——已去而不再相續。

「未生起者[故]未生,憑現在者而活;

隨心之壞滅而世間已死,[所餘]是就勝義[所立]的施設。」(《大義釋》39)

應如是依剎那短促而隨念死。

176. Khaṇaparittatoti paramatthato hi atiparitto sattānaṃ jīvitakkhaṇo ekacittappavattimattoyeva. Yathā nāma rathacakkaṃ pavattamānampi ekeneva nemippadesena pavattati, tiṭṭhamānampi ekeneva tiṭṭhati, evameva ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ. Tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatte satto niruddhoti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha, na jīvati, na jīvissati. Anāgate cittakkhaṇe na jīvittha, na jīvati, jīvissati. Paccuppanne cittakkhaṇe na jīvittha, jīvati, na jīvissati.
‘‘Jīvitaṃ attabhāvo ca, sukhadukkhā ca kevalā;
Ekacittasamāyuttā, lahu so vattate khaṇo.
‘‘Ye niruddhā marantassa, tiṭṭhamānassa vā idha;
Sabbepi sadisā khandhā, gatā appaṭisandhikā.
‘‘Anibbattena na jāto, paccuppannena jīvati;
Cittabhaṅgā mato loko, paññatti paramatthiyā’’ti. (mahāni. 39);
Evaṃ khaṇaparittato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
177已對照

一百七十七、如是,以這八種行相中的任何一種隨念者,依於一再作意,心得到串習,以死為所緣的念安住,諸蓋被鎮伏,諸禪支顯現。然而由於所緣是自性法,又是引生悚懼的,[這禪]未達安止,只成為已達近行的禪。而出世間禪與第二、第四無色禪,即使在自性法上,也依修習的殊勝而達到安止。因為出世間[禪]是依清淨修習的次第而達到安止;無色[禪]是依超越所緣的修習[而達到安止]。因為在那裡,只是對已達安止的禪[作]超越所緣而已。而在此處,這兩者都沒有。所以只成為已達近行的禪。這[禪]由於是依死隨念之力而生起的,便得名為「死隨念」。

而致力於這死隨唸的比丘,常不放逸,於一切有獲得不喜樂想,捨棄對生命的愛著,成為呵責惡者,多不積蓄,於諸資具離了慳垢;他的無常想達到熟習,隨之苦想與無我想也現起。猶如未修習死[隨念]的眾生在臨死之時,如同突然被猛獸、夜叉、蛇、盜賊、殺戮者所壓倒那樣,陷入怖畏、驚恐、迷亂;[他]不陷入這樣,無怖畏、不迷亂地命終。若在現法中未得達不死,身壞之後以善趣為歸趣。

因此,有善慧者確實應當不放逸,

恆常於如是有大威力的死隨念[上]。

這是關於死隨唸的詳說之門。

177. Iti imesaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ ākārānaṃ aññataraññatarena anussaratopi punappunaṃ manasikāravasena cittaṃ āsevanaṃ labhati, maraṇārammaṇā sati santiṭṭhati, nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanti, jhānaṅgāni pātubhavanti. Sabhāvadhammattā pana saṃvejanīyattā ca ārammaṇassa appanaṃ appatvā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti. Lokuttarajjhānaṃ pana dutiyacatutthāni ca āruppajjhānāni sabhāvadhammepi bhāvanāvisesena appanaṃ pāpuṇanti. Visuddhibhāvanānukkamavasena hi lokuttaraṃ appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ārammaṇātikkamabhāvanāvasena āruppaṃ. Appanāpattasseva hi jhānassa ārammaṇasamatikkamanamattaṃ tattha hoti. Idha pana tadubhayampi natthi. Tasmā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti. Tadetaṃ maraṇassatibalena uppannattā maraṇassaticceva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.
Imañca pana maraṇassatiṃ anuyutto bhikkhu satataṃ appamatto hoti, sabbabhavesu anabhiratisaññaṃ paṭilabhati, jīvitanikantiṃ jahāti, pāpagarahī hoti, asannidhibahulo parikkhāresu vigatamalamacchero, aniccasaññā cassa paricayaṃ gacchati, tadanusāreneva dukkhasaññā anattasaññā ca upaṭṭhāti. Yathā abhāvitamaraṇā sattā sahasā vāḷamigayakkhasappacoravadhakābhibhūtā viya maraṇasamaye bhayaṃ santāsaṃ sammohaṃ āpajjanti, evaṃ anāpajjitvā abhayo asammūḷho kālaṃ karoti. Sace diṭṭheva dhamme amataṃ nārādheti, kāyassa bhedā sugatiparāyano hoti.
Tasmā have appamādaṃ, kayirātha sumedhaso;
Evaṃ mahānubhāvāya, maraṇassatiyā sadāti.
Idaṃ maraṇassatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
已對照

身至念論

Kāyagatāsatikathā
178緬 1.232已對照

一百七十八、如今,凡在佛出世之外未曾轉起、非一切外道之境界,世尊在彼彼經中以多種行相稱讚——「諸比丘,一法若修習、多作,導向大悚懼。導向大義利。導向大瑜伽安穩。導向大念與正知。導向智見的獲得。導向現法樂住。導向明與解脫之果的作證。哪一法呢?身至念……(《增支部》1.563 等)。諸比丘,凡享用身至念者,他們便享用不死;諸比丘,凡不享用身至念者,他們便不享用不死。諸比丘,他們的不死已被享用……未被享用……已衰損……未衰損……已錯失……未錯失——凡其身至念已發起者」(《增支部》1.603)——如是稱讚之後,以「諸比丘,身至念如何修習、如何多作,才有大果、大功德利益呢?諸比丘,在此,比丘或前往林野」等(《中部》3.154)方式,依入出息節、威儀路節、四正知節、厭惡作意節、界作意節、九墓地節這十四節而解說的身至念業處,它的修習解說已到來。

178. Idāni yaṃ taṃ aññatra buddhuppādā appavattapubbaṃ sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ tesu tesu suttantesu ‘‘ekadhammo, bhikkhave, bhāvito bahulīkato mahato saṃvegāya saṃvattati. Mahato atthāya saṃvattati. Mahato yogakkhemāya saṃvattati. Mahato satisampajaññāya saṃvattati. Ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṃvattati. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṃvattati. Vijjāvimuttiphalasacchikiriyāya saṃvattati. Katamo ekadhammo? Kāyagatā sati… (a. ni. 1.563 ādayo). Amataṃ te, bhikkhave, paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatiṃ paribhuñjanti. Amataṃ te, bhikkhave, na paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatiṃ na paribhuñjanti. Amataṃ tesaṃ, bhikkhave, paribhuttaṃ… aparibhuttaṃ… parihīnaṃ… aparihīnaṃ… viraddhaṃ… aviraddhaṃ, yesaṃ kāyagatāsati āraddhāti (a. ni. 1.603) evaṃ bhagavatā anekehi ākārehi pasaṃsitvā ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvitā, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati kathaṃ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.154) nayena ānāpānapabbaṃ, iriyāpathapabbaṃ, catusampajaññapabbaṃ, paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbaṃ, dhātumanasikārapabbaṃ, navasivathikapabbānīti imesaṃ cuddasannaṃ pabbānaṃ vasena kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ, tassa bhāvanāniddeso anuppatto.
已對照

此中,因為威儀路節、四正知節、界作意節這三[節]是依觀而說的;九墓地節是在諸觀智之中依過患隨觀而說的;而凡在此於膨脹相等上可能成就的定的修習,那已在〈不淨[業處]的解說〉中闡明瞭;唯有入出息節與厭惡作意節這兩[節]在此是依定而說的。其中,入出息節依入出息念而本身是一個獨立的業處。而凡是這樣——「再者,諸比丘,比丘就這個身體,從腳底以上、從發端以下、以皮為邊際,觀察它充滿種種不淨:『在這身中有:頭髮、體毛……乃至……尿。』」(《中部》3.154)——以骨髓攝入腦、依厭惡作意而宣說的三十二行相業處,這在此處被意指為「身至念」。

Tattha yasmā iriyāpathapabbaṃ catusampajaññapabbaṃ dhātumanasikārapabbanti imāni tīṇi vipassanāvasena vuttāni. Nava sivathikapabbāni vipassanāñāṇesuyeva ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttāni. Yāpi cettha uddhumātakādīsu samādhibhāvanā ijjheyya, sā asubhaniddese pakāsitāyeva. Ānāpānapabbaṃ pana paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbañca imānevettha dve samādhivasena vuttāni. Tesu ānāpānapabbaṃ ānāpānassativasena visuṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṃ uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṃ pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati. Atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe… mutta’’nti (ma. ni. 3.154) evaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ aṭṭhimiñjena saṅgahetvā paṭikkūlamanasikāravasena desitaṃ dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ, idamidha kāyagatāsatīti adhippetaṃ.
179緬 1.233已對照

一百七十九、此中,這是以聖典的解釋為先導的修習解說。「就這個身體(imameva kāyaṃ)」者:即這四大種所成的腐臭之身。「從腳底以上(uddhaṃ pādatalā)」者:即從腳掌往上。「從發端以下(adho kesamatthakā)」者:即從髮梢往下。「以皮為邊際(tacapariyantaṃ)」者:即橫向以皮所限定。「觀察它充滿種種不淨(pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati)」者:即看見「這身體充滿了種種的頭髮等不淨」。怎樣[看見]呢?「在這身中有:頭髮……乃至……尿。」

此中,「有(atthi)」者:即存在。「這(imasmiṃ)」者:即於那被說為「從腳底以上、從發端以下、以皮為邊際、充滿種種不淨」的[身]中。「身(kāye)」者:即於軀體中。因為軀體由於是不淨的積聚,又由於是可厭的頭髮等以及眼病等數百種病的生處,故被稱為「身(kāya)」。「頭髮、體毛(kesā lomā)」者:即這頭髮等三十二行相。此中應知這樣的連結:「在這身中有頭髮,在這身中有體毛」。

因為在這從腳底以上、從發端以下、從皮向四周[算起],僅一尋之量的身軀中,縱然以一切方式搜尋,任何人也見不到任何一點點——或珍珠、或摩尼、或琉璃、或沉香、或鬱金、或樟腦、或香粉等——的絲毫淨性;反而只見到極為惡臭、令人厭惡、形相不祥的頭髮、體毛等種種不淨之物。因此說:「在這身中有:頭髮、體毛……乃至……尿。」這是此中依詞句連結的解釋。

179. Tatthāyaṃ pāḷivaṇṇanāpubbaṅgamo bhāvanāniddeso. Imameva kāyanti imaṃ catumahābhūtikaṃ pūtikāyaṃ. Uddhaṃ pādatalāti pādatalato upari. Adho kesamatthakāti kesaggato heṭṭhā. Tacapariyantanti tiriyaṃ tacaparicchinnaṃ. Pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhatīti nānappakārakesādiasucibharito ayaṃ kāyoti passati. Kathaṃ? Atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā…pe… muttanti.
Tattha atthīti saṃvijjanti. Imasminti yvāyaṃ uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyanto pūro nānappakārassa asucinoti vuccati, tasmiṃ. Kāyeti sarīre. Sarīraṃ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ kesādīnañceva cakkhurogādīnañca rogasatānaṃ āyabhūtato kāyoti vuccati. Kesā lomāti ete kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā. Tattha atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā, atthi imasmiṃ kāye lomāti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo.
Imasmiṃ hi pādatalā paṭṭhāya upari, kesamatthakā paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, tacato paṭṭhāya paritoti ettake byāmamatte kaḷevare sabbākārenapi vicinanto na koci kiñci muttaṃ vā maṇiṃ vā veḷuriyaṃ vā agaruṃ vā kuṅkumaṃ vā kappūraṃ vā vāsacuṇṇādiṃ vā aṇumattampi sucibhāvaṃ passati, atha kho paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ asirikadassanaṃ nānappakāraṃ kesalomādibhedaṃ asuciṃyeva passati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe… mutta’’nti. Ayamettha padasambandhato vaṇṇanā.
180緬 1.234已對照

一百八十、而欲修習這業處的初學的良家子,應親近前述那樣的善友,受取這業處。而他為[那人]講說業處時,也應教示七種學取善巧與十種作意善巧。此中,應如是教示七種學取善巧:依語,依意,依顏色,依形狀,依方位,依處所,依界限。

因為在這厭惡作意業處中,即使是通曉三藏者,在作意之時也應首先以語誦習。因為對某些人來說,正在誦習之時業處就變得明顯,猶如在住摩羅耶的大天長老(Malayavāsī Mahādevatthera)座下受取業處的兩位長老那樣。相傳,長老被他們請求業處時,[說]「四個月之中只誦習這個」,便給了[他們]三十二行相的聖典。他們雖然熟習兩三部尼柯耶,但由於善持教誡,四個月中只誦習三十二行相,就成為須陀洹。所以講說業處的阿闍梨應對弟子說:「首先以語誦習吧。」

而誦習者應劃分皮五法等,依順、逆[次第]誦習。即說了「頭髮、體毛、指甲、牙齒、皮膚」之後,再逆著說「皮膚、牙齒、指甲、體毛、頭髮」。

其次,在腎五法中,說了「肉、腱、骨、骨髓、腎」之後,再逆著說「腎、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮膚、牙齒、指甲、體毛、頭髮」。

然後,在肺五法中,說了「心、肝、肋膜、脾、肺」之後,再逆著說「肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心,腎、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮膚、牙齒、指甲、體毛、頭髮」。

然後,在腦五法中,說了「腸、腸間膜、胃中物、糞、腦」之後,再逆著說「腦、糞、胃中物、腸間膜、腸,肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心,腎、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮膚、牙齒、指甲、體毛、頭髮」。

然後,在脂肪六法中,說了「膽汁、痰、膿、血、汗、脂肪」之後,再逆著說「脂肪、汗、血、膿、痰、膽汁,腦、糞、胃中物、腸間膜、腸,肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心,腎、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮膚、牙齒、指甲、體毛、頭髮」。

然後,在尿六法中,說了「淚、膏、唾、涕、關節滑液、尿」之後,再逆著說「尿、關節滑液、涕、唾、膏、淚,脂肪、汗、血、膿、痰、膽汁,腦、糞、胃中物、腸間膜、腸,肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心,腎、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮膚、牙齒、指甲、體毛、頭髮」。

應如是以語誦習一百次、一千次,甚至十萬次。因為以語誦習,業處的聖典就變得純熟,心不向這裡那裡奔馳。諸部分變得明顯,看起來猶如[交握的]手指之列,猶如籬笆樁之列。

而如以語[誦習],同樣也應以意誦習。因為以語誦習是以意誦習的緣;以意誦習是通達[不淨]相的緣。

「依顏色(vaṇṇato)」者:應辨定頭髮等的顏色。

「依形狀(saṇṭhānato)」者:應辨定它們的形狀。

「依方位(disato)」者:因為在這身體中,臍以上是上方,以下是下方,所以應如是辨定方位:「這部分屬於這一方位」。

「依處所(okāsato)」者:應如是辨定各個[部分]的處所:「這部分住立於這一處所」。

「依界限(paricchedato)」者:界限有兩種:同分界限與異分界限。此中,應如是了知同分界限:「這部分在下、在上、在橫向,以這個為界」。應依不相混雜而如是了知異分界限:「頭髮不是體毛,體毛也不是頭髮」。

而如是教示七種學取善巧者,應先了知「這業處在某經中是依厭惡而說的,在某經中是依界而說的」,然後教示。因為這[業處]在《大念處[經]》(《長部》2.377)中只依厭惡而說;在《大象跡喻[經]》(《中部》1.300 等)、《教誡羅睺羅大[經]》(《中部》2.113 等)、《界分別[經]》(《中部》3.342 等)中依界而說;而在《身至唸經》(《中部》3.153)中,是就以顏色而[令業處]現起的人,分別了四禪。此中,依界而說的是觀業處;依厭惡而說的是止業處。這在此處只是止業處。

180. Imaṃ pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena vuttappakāraṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ upasaṅkamitvā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Tenāpissa kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ dasadhā ca manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tattha vacasā manasā vaṇṇato saṇṭhānato disato okāsato paricchedatoti evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ.
Imasmiṃ hi paṭikkūlamanasikārakammaṭṭhāne yopi tipiṭako hoti, tenāpi manasikārakāle paṭhamaṃ vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Ekaccassa hi sajjhāyaṃ karontasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti malayavāsī mahādevattherassa santike uggahitakammaṭṭhānānaṃ dvinnaṃ therānaṃ viya. Thero kira tehi kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācito cattāro māse imaṃyeva sajjhāyaṃ karothāti dvattiṃsākārapāḷiṃ adāsi. Te kiñcāpi nesaṃ dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā, padakkhiṇaggāhitāya pana cattāro māse dvattiṃsākāraṃ sajjhāyantāva sotāpannā ahesuṃ. Tasmā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena ācariyena antevāsiko vattabbo ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva vācāya sajjhāyaṃ karohī’’ti.
Karontena ca tacapañcakādīni paricchinditvā anulomapaṭilomavasena sajjhāyo kātabbo. Kesā lomā nakhā dantā tacoti hi vatvā puna paṭilomato taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tadanantaraṃ vakkapañcake maṃsaṃ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṃ vakkanti vatvā puna paṭilomato vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tato papphāsapañcake hadayaṃ yakanaṃ kilomakaṃ pihakaṃ papphāsanti vatvā puna paṭilomato papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tato matthaluṅgapañcake antaṃ antaguṇaṃ udariyaṃ karīsaṃ matthaluṅganti vatvā puna paṭilomato matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tato medachakke pittaṃ semhaṃ pubbo lohitaṃ sedo medoti vatvā puna paṭilomato medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ, matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tato muttachakke assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttanti vatvā puna paṭilomato muttaṃ lasikā siṅghāṇikā kheḷo vasā assu, medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ, matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Evaṃ kālasataṃ kālasahassaṃ kālasatasahassampi vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyena hi kammaṭṭhānatanti paguṇā hoti, na ito cito ca cittaṃ vidhāvati. Koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, hatthasaṅkhalikā viya vatipādapanti viya ca khāyanti.
Yathā pana vacasā, tatheva manasāpi sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyo hi manasā sajjhāyassa paccayo hoti. Manasā sajjhāyo lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa paccayo hoti.
Vaṇṇatoti kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇo vavatthapetabbo.
Saṇṭhānatoti tesaññeva saṇṭhānaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ.
Disatoti imasmiṃ hi sarīre nābhito uddhaṃ uparimadisā, adho heṭṭhimadisā, tasmā ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imissā nāma disāyāti disā vavatthapetabbā.
Okāsatoti ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imasmiṃ nāma okāse patiṭṭhitoti evaṃ tassa tassa okāso vavatthapetabbo.
Paricchedatoti sabhāgaparicchedo visabhāgaparicchedoti dve paricchedā. Tattha ayaṃ koṭṭhāso heṭṭhā ca upari ca tiriyañca iminā nāma paricchinnoti evaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo. Kesā na lomā, lomāpi na kesāti evaṃ amissakatāvasena visabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo.
Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhantena pana idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ asukasmiṃ sutte paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ, asukasmiṃ dhātuvasenāti ñatvā ācikkhitabbaṃ. Idañhi mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.377) paṭikkūlavaseneva kathitaṃ. Mahāhatthipadopama(ma. ni. 1.300 ādayo) mahārāhulovāda(ma. ni. 2.113 ādayo) dhātuvibhaṅgesu(ma. ni. 3.342 ādayo) dhātuvasena kathitaṃ. Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153) pana yassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya cattāri jhānāni vibhattāni. Tattha dhātuvasena kathitaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadetaṃ idha samathakammaṭṭhānamevāti.
181緬 1.236已對照

一百八十一、如是教示七種學取善巧之後,應如是教示十種作意善巧:依次第,不太快,不太慢,依排除散亂,依超越施設,依次第捨棄,依安止,以及三部經。此中,「依次第(anupubbato)」者:這[業處]從誦習開始,應依次第逐一作意,不應跳隔一個[作意]。因為跳隔一個作意者,猶如不熟練的人跳隔一級攀登三十二級的梯子,身體疲倦而跌落,不能完成攀登;正是這樣,由於未證得應依修習的成就而證得的樂味,心疲倦而跌落,不能完成修習。

而依次第作意者,也應不太快地作意。因為太快地作意者,猶如有人走上三由旬的路,不留意[該]拐入與離開[之處],以快速的步伐來回走了一百趟,雖然路程走到了盡頭,卻仍須問[人]才能走;正是這樣,[他]只是使業處到達終點,[業處]卻不明晰,帶不來殊勝,所以應不太快地作意。

而如不太快,同樣也應不太慢。因為太慢地作意者,猶如有人想在當天走完三由旬的路,在途中於樹、山、池等處逗留,路程走不到盡頭,須兩三天才走完;正是這樣,業處到不了終點,不成為證得殊勝之緣。

「依排除散亂(vikkhepapaṭibāhanato)」者:應排除捨棄業處而向外於種種所緣上的心之散亂。因為不排除者,猶如有人走上僅容一足的懸崖之路,不留意落腳之處,東張西望,便失足,於是從百人深的懸崖跌下;正是這樣,有向外的散亂時,業處便退失、毀壞。所以應依排除散亂而作意。

「依超越施設(paṇṇattisamatikkamanato)」者:應超越這「頭髮、體毛」等施設,把心安置於「厭惡」。因為猶如在缺水之時,人們在林野中看見一口井,在那裡繫上一片多羅葉等某種標記,憑著那標記前來沐浴、飲水;而當由於他們頻繁往來、來來去去的足跡已明顯時,就不必用標記,在想去的任何時候就去沐浴、飲水;正是這樣,在前分依「頭髮、體毛」這施設而作意者,厭惡性便明顯。然後應超越「頭髮、體毛」這施設,只把心安置於厭惡性上。

「依次第捨棄(anupubbamuñcanato)」者:哪個部分不現起,就捨棄那個[部分],應依次第捨棄而作意。因為初學者作意「頭髮」時,作意前進而只碰觸到「尿」這最後的部分而止;作意「尿」時,作意前進而只碰觸到「頭髮」這最初的部分而止。然後當他一再作意時,有些部分現起,有些不現起。因此,應先在那些現起的[部分]上作功夫,直到有兩個現起,其中又有一個更善地現起;而對如是現起的那一個,應一再作意,令安止生起。

此中有這個譬喻——猶如想捉住住在有三十二棵多羅樹的多羅林中的獼猴的獵人,以箭射穿最前面那棵多羅樹的葉子而發出呼喊;於是那獼猴依次落在一棵又一棵多羅樹上,直到最後一棵多羅樹;獵人在那裡也照樣做了,[獼猴]又依同樣方式回到最前面的多羅樹;它如是一再被驅趕,在每一呼喊之處跳起,漸漸落在某一棵多羅樹上,緊緊抓住樹中央的多羅嫩葉芯,即使被射也不跳起——應知這[修習]也是如此。

此中,這是譬喻的會通——因為猶如多羅林中有三十二棵多羅樹,同樣,這身中有三十二個部分。心猶如獼猴。瑜伽行者猶如獵人。瑜伽者的心依所緣而在有三十二部分的身中游走,猶如獼猴住在有三十二棵多羅樹的多羅林中。瑜伽者開始作意「頭髮」時,[心]依次前進而只在最後的部分上住立,猶如獵人以箭射穿最前面那棵多羅樹的葉子而發出呼喊時,獼猴落在一棵又一棵多羅樹上而到達最後一棵多羅樹。在返回時也是這個方式。一再作意者,在某些[部分]現起時,捨棄不現起的,在現起的[部分]上作遍作,猶如一再被驅趕的獼猴在每一呼喊之處跳起。最後有兩個現起時,對其中更善地現起的那一個一再作意而令安止生起,猶如[獼猴]漸漸落在某一棵多羅樹上,緊緊抓住樹中央的多羅嫩葉芯,即使被射也不跳起。

另一個譬喻——猶如一位常乞食的比丘,依一個有三十二戶人家的村落而住,在第一家就得到兩份食物,便捨去後面一家。次日得到三份,便捨去後面兩家。第三日在最初[一家]就得到滿缽,便去坐堂受用。應知這[修習]也是如此。因為三十二行相猶如有三十二戶人家的村落。瑜伽行者猶如常乞食者。瑜伽者在三十二行相上作遍作,猶如他依那村落而住。一再作意者捨棄不現起的,在現起的[部分]上作遍作,直到[剩下]兩個部分,猶如在第一家得到兩份食物而捨去後面一家,以及第二日得到三份而捨去後面兩家。對兩個之中更善地現起的那一個一再作意而令安止生起,猶如第三日在最初[一家]就得到滿缽,坐在坐堂中受用。

「依安止(appanāto)」者:依安止的部分,應知在頭髮等每一部分上都有安止——這正是此中的意趣。

「以及三部經(tayo ca suttantā)」者:應知增上心、清涼、覺支善巧這三部經是為了配合精進與定——這是此中的意趣。此中——

「諸比丘,致力於增上心的比丘,應時時作意三種相。應時時作意定相。應時時作意策勵相。應時時作意舍相。諸比丘,若致力於增上心的比丘一向只作意定相,那心有可能導向懈怠。諸比丘,若致力於增上心的比丘一向只作意策勵相,那心有可能導向掉舉。諸比丘,若致力於增上心的比丘一向只作意舍相,那心有可能不為諸漏的滅盡而正確得定。諸比丘,而當致力於增上心的比丘時時作意定相、策勵相、舍相時,那心便成為柔軟的、適業的、光明的,而且不易碎壞,為諸漏的滅盡而正確得定。

「諸比丘,猶如金匠或金匠的弟子造爐;造了爐之後,點燃爐口;點燃了爐口之後,用鉗子夾取金,放入爐口之後,時時吹煉,時時灑水,時時旁觀。諸比丘,若金匠或金匠的弟子對那金一向只吹煉,那金有可能被燒焦。諸比丘,若金匠或金匠的弟子對那金一向只灑水,那金有可能冷卻。諸比丘,若金匠或金匠的弟子對那金一向只旁觀,那金有可能不能正確地達到成熟。諸比丘,而當金匠或金匠的弟子對那金時時吹煉、時時灑水、時時旁觀時,那金便成為柔軟的、適業的、光明的,而且不易碎壞,正確地堪於作業。無論他想要哪一種裝飾品——或是頭帶,或是耳環,或是項飾,或是金鬘——它都能成就他那目的。

「同樣,諸比丘,致力於增上心的……乃至……為諸漏的滅盡而正確得定。凡為證知、作證而使心轉向任何應以證知作證之法,當有其因時,他便於彼彼[法]上達到親證之能。」(《增支部》3.103)

應知這部經是「增上心」。

「諸比丘,具足六法的比丘,能夠作證無上清涼。哪六[法]呢?諸比丘,在此,比丘在應抑制心之時抑制心,在應策勵心之時策勵心,在應令心喜之時令心喜,在應旁觀心之時旁觀心,傾向於殊勝,好樂涅槃。諸比丘,具足這六法的比丘,能夠作證無上清涼。」(《增支部》6.85)

應知這部經是「無上清涼」。

而覺支善巧,已在安止善巧論中顯示過了:「正是這樣,諸比丘,當心退縮之時,那時不是修習輕安覺支之時。」(《相應部》5.234)

如是,善加學取這七種學取善巧、善加辨定這十種作意善巧之後,那瑜伽者應依兩種善巧而好好學取業處。若他與阿闍梨同住一寺是方便的,就不必令[阿闍梨]如是詳細講說,[只要]善加辨定業處,致力於業處,獲得殊勝之後,再令[阿闍梨]更進一步講說。而欲住在他處者,應依前述方法令[阿闍梨]詳細講說,一再溫習,斷除一切難解之處,正依〈地遍的解說〉中所說的方式,捨棄不適合的坐臥處,住在適合的寺中,作了小障礙的斷除之後,在厭惡作意上作遍作。

而作[遍作]者,首先應在頭髮上取相。怎樣[取]呢?拔下一根或兩根頭髮,放在手掌上,首先辨定顏色。在剪[發]之處看頭髮也可以。在水缽或粥缽中看也同樣可以。若在[頭髮]黑的時候看見,就應作意為「黑的」;在白的時候,[作意為]「白的」;而在[黑白]混雜的時候,應依佔多數者而作意。而如在頭髮上,同樣,在整個皮五法上也都應看見之後才取相。

181. Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitvā anupubbato, nātisīghato, nātisaṇikato, vikkhepapaṭibāhanato, paṇṇattisamatikkamanato, anupubbamuñcanato, appanāto, tayo ca suttantāti evaṃ dasadhā manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tattha anupubbatoti idañhi sajjhāyakaraṇato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭiyā manasikātabbaṃ, na ekantarikāya. Ekantarikāya hi manasikaronto yathā nāma akusalo puriso dvattiṃsapadaṃ nisseṇiṃ ekantarikāya ārohanto kilantakāyo patati, na ārohanaṃ sampādeti, evameva bhāvanāsampattivasena adhigantabbassa assādassa anadhigamā kilantacitto patati, na bhāvanaṃ sampādeti.
Anupubbato manasikarontenāpi ca nātisīghato manasikātabbaṃ. Atisīghato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tiyojanamaggaṃ paṭipajjitvā okkamanavissajjanaṃ asallakkhetvā sīghena javena satakkhattumpi gamanāgamanaṃ karoto purisassa kiñcāpi addhānaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati, atha kho pucchitvāva gantabbaṃ hoti, evameva kevalaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇāti, avibhūtaṃ pana hoti, na visesaṃ āvahati, tasmā nātisīghato manasikātabbaṃ.
Yathā ca nātisīghato, evaṃ nātisaṇikatopi. Atisaṇikato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tadaheva tiyojanamaggaṃ gantukāmassa purisassa antarāmagge rukkhapabbatataḷākādīsu vilambamānassa maggo parikkhayaṃ na gacchati, dvīhatīhena pariyosāpetabbo hoti, evameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, visesādhigamassa paccayo na hoti.
Vikkhepapaṭibāhanatoti kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cetaso vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. Appaṭibāhato hi yathā nāma ekapadikaṃ papātamaggaṃ paṭipannassa purisassa akkamanapadaṃ asallakkhetvā ito cito ca vilokayato padavāro virajjhati, tato sataporise papāte patitabbaṃ hoti, evameva bahiddhā vikkhepe sati kammaṭṭhānaṃ parihāyati paridhaṃsati. Tasmā vikkhepapaṭibāhanato manasikātabbaṃ.
Paṇṇattisamatikkamanatoti yāyaṃ kesā lomātiādikā paṇṇatti, taṃ atikkamitvā paṭikkūlanti cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Yathā hi udakadullabhakāle manussā araññe udapānaṃ disvā tattha tālapaṇṇādikaṃ kiñcideva saññāṇaṃ bandhitvā tena saññāṇena āgantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca. Yadā pana nesaṃ abhiṇhasañcārena āgatāgatapadaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tadā saññāṇena kiccaṃ na hoti, icchiticchitakkhaṇe gantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca, evameva pubbabhāge kesā lomātipaṇṇattivasena manasikaroto paṭikkūlabhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Atha kesā lomātipaṇṇattiṃ samatikkamitvā paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ.
Anupubbamuñcanatoti yo yo koṭṭhāso na upaṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ muñcantena anupubbamuñcanato manasikātabbaṃ. Ādikammikassa hi kesāti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā muttanti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. Muttanti ca manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā kesāti imaṃ ādikoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. Athassa manasikaroto manasikaroto keci koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, keci na upaṭṭhahanti. Tena ye ye upaṭṭhahanti, tesu tesu tāva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yāva dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu tesampi eko suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ pana tameva punappunaṃ manasikarontena appanā uppādetabbā.
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi dvattiṃsatālake tālavane vasantaṃ makkaṭaṃ gahetukāmo luddo ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiṃ kareyya, atha kho so makkaṭo paṭipāṭiyā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālameva gaccheyya, tatthapi gantvā luddena tatheva kate puna teneva nayena āditālaṃ āgaccheyya, so evaṃ punappunaṃ paripātiyamāno ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāneyeva uṭṭhahitvā anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa vemajjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānopi na uṭṭhaheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – yathā hi tālavane dvattiṃsatālā, evaṃ imasmiṃ kāye dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsā. Makkaṭo viya cittaṃ. Luddo viya yogāvacaro. Makkaṭassa dvattiṃsatālake tālavane nivāso viya yogino cittassa dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsake kāye ārammaṇavasena anusañcaraṇaṃ. Luddena ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiyā katāya makkaṭassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālagamanaṃ viya yogino kesāti manasikāre āraddhe paṭipāṭiyā gantvā pariyosānakoṭṭhāseyeva cittassa saṇṭhānaṃ. Puna paccāgamanepi eseva nayo. Punappunaṃ paripātiyamānassa makkaṭassa ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne uṭṭhānaṃ viya punappunaṃ manasikaroto kesuci kesuci upaṭṭhitesu anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu parikammakaraṇaṃ. Anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa majjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānassapi anuṭṭhānaṃ viya avasāne dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhāti, tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
Aparāpi upamā – yathā nāma piṇḍapātiko bhikkhu dvattiṃsakulaṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vasanto paṭhamageheyeva dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekaṃ vissajjeyya. Punadivase tisso labhitvā parato dve vissajjeyya. Tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā paribhuñjeyya. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dvattiṃsakulagāmo viya hi dvattiṃsākāro. Piṇḍapātiko viya yogāvacaro. Tassa taṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vāso viya yogino dvattiṃsākāre parikammakaraṇaṃ. Paṭhamagehe dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekissā vissajjanaṃ viya dutiyadivase tisso labhitvā parato dvinnaṃ vissajjanaṃ viya ca manasikaroto manasikaroto anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu yāva koṭṭhāsadvaye parikammakaraṇaṃ. Tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālāyaṃ nisīditvā paribhogo viya dvīsu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhāti, tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
Appanātoti appanākoṭṭhāsato kesādīsu ekekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse appanā hotīti veditabbāti ayamevettha adhippāyo.
Tayo ca suttantāti adhicittaṃ, sītibhāvo, bojjhaṅgakosallanti ime tayo suttantā vīriyasamādhiyojanatthaṃ veditabbāti ayamettha adhippāyo. Tattha –
‘‘Adhicittamanuyuttena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tīṇi nimittāni kālenakālaṃ manasikātabbāni. Kālenakālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Kālenakālaṃ paggahanimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Kālenakālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ samādhinimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ paggahanimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ uddhaccāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ upekkhānimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ na sammā samādhiyeyya āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu kālenakālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ paggahanimittaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikaroti, taṃ hoti cittaṃ muduñca kammaññañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya.
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkaṃ bandhati, ukkaṃ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpeti, ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpetvā saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṃ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipitvā kālenakālaṃ abhidhamati, kālenakālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālenakālaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ abhidhameyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ ḍaheyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ udakena paripphoseyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ nibbāyeyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ ajjhupekkheyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ na sammā paripākaṃ gaccheyya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ kālenakālaṃ abhidhamati, kālenakālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālenakālaṃ ajjhupekkhati, taṃ hoti jātarūpaṃ muduñca kammaññañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā upeti kammāya. Yassā yassā ca piḷandhanavikatiyā ākaṅkhati yadi paṭikāya yadi kuṇḍalāya yadi gīveyyāya yadi suvaṇṇamālāya, tañcassa atthaṃ anubhoti.
‘‘Evameva kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyuttena…pe… samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yassa yassa ca abhiññā sacchi karaṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṃ abhininnāmeti abhiññā sacchi kiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati sati āyatane’’ti (a. ni. 3.103).
Idaṃ suttaṃ adhicittanti veditabbaṃ.
‘‘Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātuṃ. Katamehi chahi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Paṇītādhimuttiko ca hoti nibbānābhirato. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, chahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātu’’nti (a. ni. 6.85).
Idaṃ suttaṃ anuttaraṃ sītibhāvoti veditabbaṃ.
Bojjhaṅgakosallaṃ ‘‘pana evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234) appanākosallakathāyaṃ dassitameva.
Iti idaṃ sattavidhaṃ uggahakosallaṃ suggahitaṃ katvā idañca dasavidhaṃ manasikārakosallaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā tena yoginā ubhayakosallavasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ sādhukaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Sace panassa ācariyena saddhiṃ ekavihāreyeva phāsu hoti, evaṃ vitthārena akathāpetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyujjantena visesaṃ labhitvā uparūpari kathāpetabbaṃ. Aññattha vasitukāmena yathāvuttena vidhinā vitthārato kathāpetvā punappunaṃ parivattetvā sabbaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā pathavīkasiṇaniddese vuttanayeneva ananurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ pahāya anurūpe vihāre vasantena khuddakapalibodhupacchedaṃ katvā paṭikkūlamanasikāre parikammaṃ kātabbaṃ.
Karontena pana kesesu tāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ vā dve vā kese luñcitvā hatthatale ṭhapetvā vaṇṇo tāva vavatthapetabbo. Chinnaṭṭhānepi kese oloketuṃ vaṭṭati. Udakapatte vā yāgupatte vā oloketumpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Kāḷakakāle disvā kāḷakāti manasikātabbā. Setakāle setāti. Missakakāle pana ussadavasena manasikātabbā honti. Yathā ca kesesu, evaṃ sakalepi tacapañcake disvāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ.
已對照

部分差別論

Koṭṭhāsavavatthāpanakathā
182已對照

一百八十二、如是取了相之後,應依顏色、形狀、方位、處所、界限辨定一切部分,[再]依顏色、形狀、氣味、所依、處所,以五種[方式]辨定[它們]為厭惡的。

182. Evaṃ nimittaṃ gahetvā sabbakoṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhaāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthapetabbā.
已對照

此中,這是關於一切部分的次第之說。首先,頭髮依其本來的顏色是黑的,是鮮無患子(addāriṭṭhaka)的顏色。依形狀,是長而圓的,如秤桿之形。依方位,生於上方。依處所,兩側以鬢角、前面以額邊、後面以頸根為界限。包裹頭顱的溼皮,是頭髮的處所。依界限,頭髮以下面其自身入於包頭之皮約一穀粒尖許而立住的根底、上面以虛空、橫向以彼此為界限;沒有兩根頭髮[長]在一處——這是同分界限。「頭髮不是體毛,體毛不是頭髮」——如是不與其餘三十一部分相混雜、名為頭髮的是一個各別的部分——這是異分界限。這是依顏色等對頭髮的辨定。

Tatrāyaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu anupubbakathā. Kesā tāva pakativaṇṇena kāḷakā addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato dīghavaṭṭalikā tulādaṇḍasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi, purato nalāṭantena, pacchato galavāṭakena paricchinnā. Sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanaṃ allacammaṃ kesānaṃ okāso. Paricchedato kesā sīsaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve kesā ekato natthīti ayaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Kesā na lomā, lomā na kesāti evaṃ avasesaekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsehi amissīkatā kesā nāma pāṭiyekko ekakoṭṭhāsoti ayaṃ visabhāgaparicchedo. Idaṃ kesānaṃ vaṇṇādito vavatthāpanaṃ.
183已對照

一百八十三、而這是依顏色等以五種[方式]辨定它們為厭惡的。這些名為頭髮的,依顏色也是厭惡的,依形狀、依氣味、依所依、依處所也是厭惡的。

183. Idaṃ pana nesaṃ vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthāpanaṃ. Kesā nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikkūlā. Saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikkūlā.
緬 1.242已對照

因為[人們]即使在可意的粥缽或飯缽中,見到任何頭髮顏色的東西,也嫌惡道:「這混有頭髮,把它拿走!」如是,頭髮依顏色是厭惡的。即使夜裡進食時,觸到頭髮形狀的牛角瓜(akka)纖維或麻(makaci)纖維,也同樣嫌惡。如是,依形狀是厭惡的。

Manuññepi hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā kesamissakamidaṃ haratha nanti jigucchanti. Evaṃ kesā vaṇṇato paṭikkūlā. Rattiṃ bhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvāpi tatheva jigucchanti. Evaṃ saṇṭhānato paṭikkūlā.
已對照

而離了塗油、花、薰香等修飾的頭髮,其氣味是極可憎的;投入火中的,比那更可憎。因為頭髮依顏色、形狀或許不是厭惡的,而依氣味卻正是厭惡的。猶如幼小孩童的大便,依顏色是鬱金色,依形狀也是鬱金團之形;又被丟棄在垃圾堆裡的膨脹的黑狗屍體,依顏色是熟多羅果之色,依形狀是滾轉後棄置的鼓之形,它的獠牙也似素馨花蕾——這兩者依顏色、形狀或許不是厭惡的,而依氣味卻正是厭惡的。如是,頭髮依顏色、形狀或許也不是厭惡的,而依氣味卻正是厭惡的。

Telamakkhanapupphadhūpādi saṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti. Tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlāpi siyuṃ, gandhena pana paṭikkūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisāti ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikkūlaṃ gandhena pana paṭikkūlameva. Evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlā gandhena pana paṭikkūlāyevāti.
已對照

又猶如在不淨之處,依村落[流出]的汙水而生長的作湯的菜葉,對城裡人來說是可憎的、不可受用的;如是,頭髮也由於是依膿、血、尿、糞、膽汁、痰等的流出物而生長的,所以是可憎的——這是它們依所依的厭惡性。

Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā jegucchāti idaṃ nesaṃ āsayato pāṭikkulyaṃ.
已對照

而這些名為頭髮的,猶如在糞堆上長出的菌,是生於三十一部分之堆中的。它們猶如生於冢間、垃圾堆等處的菜蔬,又猶如生於溝渠等處的蓮花、青蓮等花,由於生於不淨之處,所以是極可憎的——這是它們依處所的厭惡性。

Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā. Te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya parikkhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti idaṃ nesaṃ okāsato pāṭikkulyaṃ.
已對照

又如頭髮[的厭惡性],一切部分的厭惡性也應如是依顏色、形狀、氣味、所依、處所以五種[方式]而知;而依顏色、形狀、方位、處所、界限,則應把一切[部分]一一分別辨定。

Yathā ca kesānaṃ, evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlatā veditabbā. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena pana sabbepi visuṃ visuṃ vavatthapetabbā.
184緬 1.243已對照

一百八十四、此中,首先,體毛依其本來的顏色,不像頭髮那樣純黑,而是黑褐色的。依形狀,是末端下彎的,如多羅樹根之形。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,除了頭髮所立住之處與手掌、腳掌之外,大多生於包裹其餘身體的皮上。依界限,以下面其自身入於包身之皮約一蟣許而立住的根底、上面以虛空、橫向以彼此為界限;沒有兩根體毛[長]在一處——這是它們的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

184. Tattha lomā tāva pakativaṇṇato na kesā viya asambhinnakāḷakā, kāḷapiṅgalā pana honti. Saṇṭhānato onataggā tālamūlasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato ṭhapetvā kesānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsañca hatthapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena avasesasarīraveṭhanacamme jātā. Paricchedato sarīraveṭhanacamme likhāmattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve lomā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
185已對照

一百八十五、指甲者:是二十片甲片的名稱。它們全都依顏色是白色的。依形狀,如魚鱗之形。依方位,腳指甲在下方、手指甲在上方,如是生於兩方。依處所,立住於諸指的末端背面。依界限,以兩側的指端之肉、裡面的指背之肉、外面及末端的虛空、橫向以彼此為界限;沒有兩片指甲[長]在一處——這是它們的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

185. Nakhāti vīsatiyā nakhapattānaṃ nāmaṃ. Te sabbepi vaṇṇato setā. Saṇṭhānato macchasakalikasaṇṭhānā. Disato pādanakhā heṭṭhimadisāya, hatthanakhā uparimadisāyāti dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṅgulīnaṃ aggapiṭṭhesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato dvīsu disāsu aṅgulikoṭimaṃsehi, anto aṅgulipiṭṭhimaṃsena, bahi ceva agge ca ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve nakhā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
186已對照

一百八十六、牙齒者:是牙齒完具者的三十二顆齒骨。它們也依顏色是白色的。依形狀,有種種形狀。因為它們之中,首先在下排牙齒的中間,四顆牙齒如依次插立在泥團上的葫蘆子之形;在它們兩側,各有一顆單根單尖的,如茉莉花蕾之形;其次各有一顆雙根雙尖的,如車的支柱之形;其次各兩顆是三根三尖的;其次各兩顆是四根四尖的。上排也是這一方法。依方位,生於上方。依處所,立住於兩塊顎骨上。依界限,以下面其自身立住於顎骨中的根底、上面以虛空、橫向以彼此為界限;沒有兩顆牙齒[長]在一處——這是它們的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

186. Dantāti paripuṇṇadantassa dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhikāni. Tepi vaṇṇato setā. Saṇṭhānato anekasaṇṭhānā. Tesaṃ hi heṭṭhimāya tāva dantapāḷiyā majjhe cattāro dantā mattikāpiṇḍe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitaalābubījasaṇṭhānā. Tesaṃ ubhosu passesu ekeko ekamūlako ekakoṭiko mallikamakuḷasaṇṭhāno. Tato ekeko dvimūlako dvikoṭiko yānakaupatthambhinisaṇṭhāno. Tato dve dve timūlā tikoṭikā. Tato dve dve catumūlā catukoṭikāti. Uparimapāḷiyāpi eseva nayo. Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato dvīsu hanukaṭṭhikesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā hanukaṭṭhike patiṭṭhitena attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve dantā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
187已對照

一百八十七、皮膚者:是包裹全身而住的皮。在它上面有黑、褐、黃等顏色的,名為表皮;它即使從全身刮集起來,也只有棗核大小。而皮膚依顏色唯是白色的;它的白色,在表皮被火焰的灼傷、兵器的擊打等所破壞時便顯露出來。依形狀,唯是身體的形狀。這是此中的略說。

187. Tacoti sakalasarīraṃ veṭhetvā ṭhitacammaṃ. Tassa upari kāḷasāmapītādivaṇṇā chavi nāma yā sakalasarīratopi saṅkaḍḍhiyamānā badaraṭṭhimattā hoti. Taco pana vaṇṇato setoyeva. So cassa setabhāvo aggijālābhighātapaharaṇappahārādīhi viddhaṃsitāya chaviyā pākaṭo hoti. Saṇṭhānato sarīrasaṇṭhānova hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo.
緬 1.244已對照

而依詳說:腳趾的皮膚如蠶繭之形;腳背的皮膚如有包覆、繫帶的鞋之形;小腿的皮膚如包飯的多羅葉之形;大腿的皮膚如裝滿米的長袋之形;臀部的皮膚如盛滿水的布濾水囊之形;背部的皮膚如蒙在木板上的皮之形;腹部的皮膚如蒙在琵琶槽上的皮之形;胸部的皮膚大致是方形的;兩臂的皮膚如蒙在箭筒上的皮之形;手背的皮膚如剃刀匣之形,或如梳袋之形;手指的皮膚如鑰匙匣之形;頸部的皮膚如領套之形;面部的皮膚有大大小小的孔,如蟲巢之形;頭部的皮膚如缽袋之形。

Vitthārato pana pādaṅgulittaco kosakārakakosasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhipādattaco puṭabandhaupāhanasaṇṭhāno. Jaṅghattaco bhattapuṭakatālapaṇṇasaṇṭhāno. Ūruttaco taṇḍulabharitadīghatthavikasaṇṭhāno. Ānisadattaco udakapūritapaṭaparissāvanasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhittaco phalakonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Kucchittaco vīṇādoṇikonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Urattaco yebhuyyena caturassasaṇṭhāno. Ubhayabāhuttaco tūṇironaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhihatthattaco khurakosasaṇṭhāno, phaṇakatthavikasaṇṭhāno vā. Hatthaṅgulittaco kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhāno. Gīvattaco galakañcukasaṇṭhāno. Mukhattaco chiddāvachiddo kīṭakulāvakasaṇṭhāno. Sīsattaco pattatthavikasaṇṭhānoti.
已對照

而把握皮膚的瑜伽行者,應從上唇開始,把智向上推向面部,首先辨定包覆面部而住的皮;其次[辨定]額骨的皮;其次,猶如在放入袋中的缽與袋之間[伸入]手一般,在頭骨與頭皮之間推入智,分離皮與骨相連之狀,而辨定頭皮;其次[辨定]肩部的皮;其次順著、逆著[辨定]右手的皮;接著依同一方法[辨定]左手的皮;其次[辨定]背部的皮,辨定了它之後,順著、逆著[辨定]右腳的皮;接著依同一方法[辨定]左腳的皮;其次應依次辨定小腹、腹部、心窩、頸部的皮;接著在頸部的皮之後辨定下顎的皮,推至下唇為止,而後完成。如是一一把握粗顯者時,細微者也會顯現。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,包覆全身而住。依界限,以下面[其]立住的底面、上面以虛空為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

Tacapariggaṇhakena ca yogāvacarena uttaroṭṭhato paṭṭhāya uparimukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva mukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato nalāṭaṭṭhicammaṃ. Tato thavikāya pakkhittapattassa ca thavikāya ca antarena hatthamiva sīsaṭṭhikassa ca sīsacammassa ca antarena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā aṭṭhikena saddhiṃ cammassa ekābaddhabhāvaṃ viyojentena sīsacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato khandhacammaṃ. Tato anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇahatthacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmahatthacammaṃ. Tato piṭṭhicammaṃ taṃ vavatthapetvā anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇapādacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmapādacammaṃ. Tato anukkameneva vatthiudarahadayagīvacammāni vavatthapetabbāni. Atha gīvacammānantaraṃ heṭṭhimahanucammaṃ vavatthapetvā adharoṭṭhapariyosānaṃ pāpetvā niṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sakalasarīraṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhito. Paricchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitatalena, upari ākāsena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
188緬 1.245已對照

一百八十八、肉者:是九百塊肉片。它全都依顏色是紅色的,似甄叔迦花。依形狀,小腿肚的肉如多羅葉包飯之形;大腿的肉如磨石的碾子之形;臀部的肉如灶的邊角之形;背部的肉如多羅糖餅之形;兩肋的肉如塗在穀倉內壁的薄泥之形;乳房的肉如揉成團後拋下的泥團之形;兩臂的肉如剝了皮、折成兩疊放著的大老鼠之形。如是一一把握粗顯者時,細微者也會顯現。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,塗覆三百二十塊骨而住。依界限,以下面立住於骨架上的底面、上面以皮膚、橫向以彼此為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

188. Maṃsanti nava maṃsapesisatāni. Taṃ sabbampi vaṇṇato rattaṃ kiṃsukapupphasadisaṃ. Saṇṭhānato jaṅghapiṇḍikamaṃsaṃ tālapaṇṇapuṭabhattasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ūrumaṃsaṃ nisadapotasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ānisadamaṃsaṃ uddhanakoṭisaṇṭhānaṃ. Piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ tālaguḷapaṭalasaṇṭhānaṃ. Phāsukadvayamaṃsaṃ koṭṭhalikāya kucchiyaṃ tanumattikālepasaṇṭhānaṃ. Thanamaṃsaṃ vaṭṭetvā avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bāhudvayamaṃsaṃ dviguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitaniccammamahāmūsikasaṇṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato vīsādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni anulimpitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā aṭṭhisaṅghāte patiṭṭhitatalena, upari tacena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
189已對照

一百八十九、腱者:是九百條腱。依顏色,一切腱都是白色的。依形狀,有種種形狀。因為它們之中,從頸的上部開始,有五條大腱纏繞著身體沿前側下行,五條沿後側,五條沿右側,五條沿左側;纏繞右手的,在手的前側也有五條,後側五條;纏繞左手的也是如此;纏繞右腳的,在腳的前側也有五條,後側五條;纏繞左腳的也是如此。如是,名為「持身者」的六十條大腱纏繞著身體而下行,它們也被稱為「筋(kaṇḍarā)」。它們全都如甘達拉(kandala)花蕾之形。而其他的[腱]覆蓋著各個部位而住;比那些更細的,如線繩之形;另有比那些更細的,如臭藤之形;另有比那些更細的,如大琵琶的弦之形;另有的如粗線之形。手背、腳背上的腱,如鳥足之形;頭上的腱,如孩童的頭網之形;背上的腱,如攤在日中的溼網之形;其餘隨著各個大小肢體的腱,如穿在身上的網衣之形。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,在全身繫縛諸骨而住。依界限,以下面立住於三百塊骨之上的底面、上面以觸及肉與皮而住的部位、橫向以彼此為界限——這是它們的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

189. Nhārūti nava nhārusatāni. Vaṇṇato sabbepi nhārū setā. Saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānā. Etesu hi gīvāya uparimabhāgato paṭṭhāya pañca mahānhārū sarīraṃ vinandhamānā purimapassena otiṇṇā. Pañca pacchimapassena. Pañca dakkhiṇapassena. Pañca vāmapassena. Dakkhiṇahatthaṃ vinandhamānāpi hatthassa purimapassena pañca. Pacchimapassena pañca. Tathā vāmahatthaṃ vinandhamānā. Dakkhiṇapādaṃ vinandhamānāpi pādassa purimapassena pañca. Pacchimapassena pañca. Tathā vāmapādaṃ vinandhamānāpīti evaṃ sarīradhārakā nāma saṭṭhimahānhārū kāyaṃ vinandhamānā otiṇṇā. Ye kaṇḍarātipi vuccanti. Te sabbepi kandalamakuḷasaṇṭhānā. Aññe pana taṃ taṃ padesaṃ ajjhottharitvā ṭhitā. Tato sukhumatarā suttarajjukasaṇṭhānā. Aññe tato sukhumatarā pūtilatāsaṇṭhānā, aññe tato sukhumatarā mahāvīṇātantisaṇṭhānā. Aññe thūlasuttakasaṇṭhānā. Hatthapādapiṭṭhīsu nhārū sakuṇapādasaṇṭhānā. Sīse nhārū dārakānaṃ sīsajālakasaṇṭhānā. Piṭṭhiyaṃ nhārū ātape pasāritaallajālasaṇṭhānā. Avasesā taṃtaṃaṅgapaccaṅgānugatā nhārū sarīre paṭimukkajālakañcukasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā tiṇṇaṃ aṭṭhisatānaṃ upari patiṭṭhitatalehi, upari maṃsacammāni āhacca ṭhitappadesehi, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
190緬 1.246已對照

一百九十、骨者:除了三十二顆齒骨之外,其餘的是:六十四塊手骨,六十四塊腳骨,六十四塊依附於肉的軟骨,兩塊腳跟骨,每隻腳上各兩塊踝骨,兩塊小腿骨,一塊膝骨,一塊大腿骨,兩塊腰骨,十八塊脊骨,二十四塊肋骨,十四塊胸骨,一塊心骨,兩塊鎖骨,兩塊肩胛骨,兩塊上臂骨,[每臂]各兩塊前臂骨,七塊頸骨,兩塊顎骨,一塊鼻骨,兩塊眼骨,兩塊耳骨,一塊額骨,一塊頂骨,九塊頭蓋骨——如是約三百塊骨。它們全都依顏色是白色的。依形狀,有種種形狀。

190. Aṭṭhīti ṭhapetvā dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhīni avasesāni catusaṭṭhi hatthaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi pādaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi maṃsanissitāni muduaṭṭhīni, dve paṇhikaṭṭhīni, ekekasmiṃ pāde dve dve gopphakaṭṭhīni, dve jaṅghaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ jaṇṇukaṭṭhi, ekaṃ ūruṭṭhi, dve kaṭiṭṭhīni, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni, catuvīsati phāsukaṭṭhīni, cuddasa uraṭṭhīni, ekaṃ hadayaṭṭhi, dve akkhakaṭṭhīni, dve koṭṭaṭṭhīni, dve bāhuṭṭhīni, dve dve aggabāhuṭṭhīni, satta gīvaṭṭhīni, dve hanukaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nāsikaṭṭhi, dve akkhiṭṭhīni, dve kaṇṇaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nalāṭaṭṭhi. Ekaṃ muddhaṭṭhi, nava sīsakapālaṭṭhīnīti evaṃ timattāni aṭṭhisatāni, tāni sabbānipi vaṇṇato setāni. Saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānāni.
已對照

因為此中,腳趾末節的骨,如清水果(kataka)的種子之形;緊接著它們的中節骨,如波羅蜜果核之形;根節骨,如小鼓之形;腳背骨,如搗碎的甘達拉球莖之堆的形狀;腳跟骨,如單核多羅果的種子之形;踝骨,如捆起來的遊戲用球之形;小腿骨立於踝骨上的部位,如剝了皮的信地(sindi)樹嫩芽之形;小的小腿骨,如弓杆之形;大的,如干癟的蛇背之形;膝骨,如一邊消蝕了的泡沫團之形;此中,小腿骨立於其上的部位,如尖端不銳的牛角之形;大腿骨,如砍削粗劣的扁斧或斧頭的柄之形;它立於腰骨上的部位,如遊戲用球之形;腰骨上它所立住的部位,如削去頂端的大奔那伽(punnāga)果之形。

Tattha hi aggapādaṅguliaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni. Tadanantarāni majjhapabbaṭṭhīni panasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Paṇhikaṭṭhi ekaṭṭhitālaphalabījasaṇṭhānaṃ. Gopphakaṭṭhīni baddhakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānāni. Jaṅghaṭṭhīnaṃ gopphakaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ apanītatacasindikaḷīrasaṇṭhānaṃ. Khuddakajaṅghaṭṭhikaṃ dhanukadaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Mahantaṃ milātasappapiṭṭhisaṇṭhānaṃ. Jaṇṇukaṭṭhi ekato parikkhīṇapheṇakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tattha jaṅghaṭṭhikassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikhiṇaggagosiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ūruṭṭhi duttacchitavāsiparasudaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tassa kaṭiṭṭhimhi patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ kīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tena kaṭiṭṭhino patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ aggacchinnamahāpunnāgaphalasaṇṭhānaṃ.
已對照

兩塊腰骨相連為一,如陶匠的灶之形;各別[看],如鐵匠錘子的套環之形;位於末端的臀骨,如翻轉過來拿著的蛇冠之形,有七八處大大小小的孔;脊骨從內側[看],如一層層疊放的鉛片卷之形,從外側[看],如串起的輪環之形;它們中間各處有兩三根如鋸齒的棘突。二十四塊肋骨中,不完整的,如不完整的刀之形;完整的,如完整的刀之形;全部[合起來],如白公雞張開的翅膀之形。十四塊胸骨,如舊車輿的欄架之形。心骨,如匙頭之形。

Kaṭiṭṭhīni dvepi ekābaddhāni hutvā kumbhakārikauddhanasaṇṭhānāni. Pāṭiyekkaṃ kammārakūṭayottakasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭiyaṃ ṭhitaṃ ānisadaṭṭhi adhomukhaṃ katvā gahitasappaphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ, sattaṭṭhaṭṭhānesu chiddāvachiddaṃ. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni abbhantarato uparūpari ṭhapitasīsapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhirato vaṭṭanāvaḷisaṇṭhānāni. Tesaṃ antarantarā kakacadantasadisā dve tayo kaṇṭakā honti. Catuvīsatiyā phāsukaṭṭhīsu aparipuṇṇāni aparipuṇṇaasisaṇṭhānāni. Paripuṇṇāni paripuṇṇaasisaṇṭhānāni. Sabbānipi odātakukkuṭassa pasāritapakkhasaṇṭhānāni. Cuddasa uraṭṭhīni jiṇṇasandamānikapañjarasaṇṭhānāni. Hadayaṭṭhi dabbiphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ.
緬 1.247已對照

鎖骨,如小鐵扁斧的柄之形;肩胛骨,如一邊磨損了的師子洲鋤頭之形;上臂骨,如鏡柄之形;前臂骨,如一對多羅球莖之形;腕骨,如粘在一起放著的鉛片卷之形;手背骨,如搗碎的甘達拉球莖之堆的形狀;手指的根節骨,如小鼓之形;中節骨,如未長成的波羅蜜果核之形;末節骨,如清水果的種子之形。

Akkhakaṭṭhīni khuddakalohavāsidaṇḍasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭṭaṭṭhīni ekato parikkhīṇasīhaḷakuddālasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhuṭṭhīni ādāsadaṇḍakasaṇṭhānāni. Aggabāhuṭṭhīni yamakatālakandasaṇṭhānāni. Maṇibandhaṭṭhīni ekato alliyāpetvā ṭhapitasīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhihatthaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Hatthaṅgulīsu mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Majjhapabbaṭṭhīni aparipuṇṇapanasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Aggapabbaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni.
已對照

七塊頸骨,如以杖貫穿、依次排列的竹筍圓片之形;下顎骨,如鐵匠們的鐵錘套環之形;上[顎骨],如刮削用的小刀之形;眼窩骨與鼻窩骨,如挖去了仁的嫩多羅果核之形;額骨,如口朝下放著的貝殼碗的碎片之形;鬢角骨,如理髮匠的剃刀匣之形;額與鬢角上方系頭帶之處的骨,如滿罐[上結成]的收縮了的薄膜之片的形狀;頂骨,如切去了口的彎椰子之形;頭骨,如縫合起來放著的老葫蘆殼之形。

Satta gīvaṭṭhīni daṇḍena vijjhitvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitavaṃsakaḷīracakkalakasaṇṭhānāni. Heṭṭhimahanukaṭṭhi kammārānaṃ ayokūṭayottakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Uparimaṃ avalekhanasatthakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Akkhikūpanāsakūpaṭṭhīni apanītamiñjataruṇatālaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭaṭṭhi adhomukhaṭṭhapitasaṅkhathālakakapālasaṇṭhānaṃ. Kaṇṇacūḷikaṭṭhīni nhāpitakhurakosasaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭakaṇṇacūḷikānaṃ upari paṭṭabandhanokāse aṭṭhisaṅkuṭitaghaṭapuṇṇapaṭalakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Muddhaṭṭhi mukhacchinnavaṅkanāḷikerasaṇṭhānaṃ. Sīsaṭṭhīni sibbetvā ṭhapitajajjaralābukaṭāhasaṇṭhānāni.
已對照

依方位,生於兩方。依處所,概括而言,住於全身;而此中分別而言,頭骨立住於頸骨上,頸骨[立住]於脊骨上,脊骨[立住]於腰骨上,腰骨[立住]於大腿骨上,大腿骨[立住]於膝骨上,膝骨[立住]於小腿骨上,小腿骨[立住]於踝骨上,踝骨立住於腳背骨上。依界限,以裡面的骨髓、外面的肉、末端與根部的彼此為界限——這是它們的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

Disato dvīsu disāsu jātāni. Okāsato avisesena sakalasarīre ṭhitāni. Visesena panettha sīsaṭṭhīni givaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Gīvaṭṭhīni piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīsu. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni kaṭiṭṭhīsu. Kaṭiṭṭhīni ūruṭṭhīsu. Ūruṭṭhīni jaṇṇukaṭṭhīsu. Jaṇṇukaṭṭhīni jaṅghaṭṭhīsu. Jaṅghaṭṭhīni gopphakaṭṭhīsu. Gopphakaṭṭhīni piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Paricchedato anto aṭṭhimiñjena, uparito maṃsena, agge mūle ca aññamaññena paricchinnāni, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
191已對照

一百九十一、骨髓者:是在各塊骨內的髓。它依顏色是白色的。依形狀,在各塊大骨內的,如放入竹筒中蒸軟的大藤筍之形;在各塊細小之骨內的,如放入竹竿節中蒸軟的細藤筍之形。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,立住於諸骨之內。依界限,以諸骨的內壁為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

191. Aṭṭhimiñjanti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ miñjaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mahantamahantānaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷunāḷiyaṃ pakkhittaseditamahāvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ. Khuddānukhuddakānaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷuyaṭṭhipabbesu pakkhittaseditatanuvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantare patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaratalehi paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
192緬 1.248已對照

一百九十二、腎者:是由一條繫帶[連著]的兩塊肉團。它依顏色是淡紅的,是刺桐(pāḷibhaddaka)子的顏色。依形狀,如孩童們的一對遊戲用球之形,或如繫於同一果柄的兩個芒果之形。依方位,生於上方。依處所,被一條從頸根伸出、單根前行少許後分為兩支的粗腱所繫,環繞著心肉而住。依界限,腎以腎之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

192. Vakkanti ekabandhanā dve maṃsapiṇḍikā. Taṃ vaṇṇato mandarattaṃ pāḷibhaddakaṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dārakānaṃ yamakakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ, ekavaṇṭapaṭibaddhaambaphaladvayasaṇṭhānaṃ vā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato galavāṭakā nikkhantena ekamūlena thokaṃ gantvā dvidhā bhinnena thūlanhārunā vinibaddhaṃ hutvā hadayamaṃsaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato vakkaṃ vakkabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
193已對照

一百九十三、心者:即心肉。它依顏色是紅蓮花瓣背面的顏色。依形狀,如去掉了外層花瓣、口朝下放著的蓮花蕾之形;外面光滑,裡面似絲瓜(kosātakī)果實的內部。有慧者的稍稍開張,慧鈍者的只是合攏的花蕾。而在它裡面有一個約容一顆奔那伽果核大小的凹窩,那裡積存著約半掬的血,意界與意識界依於它而轉起。而那[血],貪行者的是紅色的,瞋行者的是黑色的,痴行者的似洗肉的水,尋行者的是馬豆湯之色,信行者的是迦尼迦羅花之色,慧行者的則是清澈、明淨、不濁、潔白、遍淨的,如洗淨的上等摩尼一般顯得光亮。依方位,生於上方。依處所,立住於身內兩乳之間。依界限,心以心之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

193. Hadayanti hadayamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattapadumapattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato bāhirapattāni apanetvā adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitapadumamakuḷasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bahi maṭṭhaṃ, anto kosātakīphalassa abbhantarasadisaṃ. Paññavantānaṃ thokaṃ vikasitaṃ, mandapaññānaṃ makuḷitameva. Anto cassa punnāgaṭṭhipatiṭṭhānamatto āvāṭako hoti, yattha addhapasatamattaṃ lohitaṃ saṇṭhāti, yaṃ nissāya manodhātu ca manoviññāṇadhātu ca vattanti. Taṃ panetaṃ rāgacaritassa rattaṃ hoti, dosacaritassa kāḷakaṃ, mohacaritassa maṃsadhovanaudakasadisaṃ, vitakkacaritassa kulatthayūsavaṇṇaṃ, saddhācaritassa kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇaṃ, paññācaritassa acchaṃ vippasannaṃ anāvilaṃ paṇḍaraṃ parisuddhaṃ niddhotajātimaṇi viya jutimantaṃ khāyati. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ majjhe patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato hadayaṃ hadayabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
194已對照

一百九十四、肝者:是成對的肉片。它依顏色是帶著淡黃成分的紅色,是不太紅的拘物頭(kumuda)花瓣背面的顏色。依形狀,根部為一、末端成對,如拘鞞陀羅葉之形。而它在鈍者[身上]只有一片,是大的;在有慧者[身上]則有兩片或三片,是小的。依方位,生於上方;依處所,在兩乳之內,依靠右側而住。依界限,肝以肝之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

194. Yakananti yamakamaṃsapaṭalaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ paṇḍukadhātukaṃ nātirattakumudassa pattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mūle ekaṃ agge yamakaṃ koviḷārapattasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tañca dandhānaṃ ekameva hoti mahantaṃ, paññavantānaṃ dve vā tīṇi vā khuddakāni. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, okāsato dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ abbhantare dakkhiṇapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato yakanaṃ yakanabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
195緬 1.249已對照

一百九十五、肋膜者:是依覆蔽、不覆蔽之別而有兩種的包覆之肉。它兩種都依顏色是白色的,是都古拉細布碎片的顏色。依形狀,是其自身處所的形狀。依方位,覆蔽的肋膜[生]於上方,另一種生於兩方。依處所,覆蔽的肋膜覆蓋著心與腎,不覆蔽的肋膜在全身皮下包覆著肉而住。依界限,以下面的肉、上面的皮、橫向以肋膜之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

195. Kilomakanti paṭicchannāpaṭicchannabhedato duvidhaṃ pariyonahanamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ duvidhampi vaṇṇato setaṃ dukūlapilotikavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato attano okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ uparimāya disāya. Itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ hadayañca vakkañca paṭicchādetvā, appaṭicchannakilomakaṃ sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ kilomakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
196已對照

一百九十六、脾者:是腹中舌狀的肉。它依顏色是青色的,是黃荊(nigguṇḍi)花的顏色。依形狀,約七指之量,不連繫帶,如黑牛犢的舌之形。依方位,生於上方。依處所,在心的左側,依靠胃膜的頂側而住;當它因兵器的擊打而露出體外時,眾生的生命便告終盡。依界限,以脾之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

196. Pihakanti udarajivhāmaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato nīlaṃ nigguṇḍipupphavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato sattaṅgulappamāṇaṃ abandhanaṃ kāḷavacchakajivhāsaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ, yasmiṃ paharaṇappahārena bahinikkhante sattānaṃ jīvitakkhayo hoti. Paricchedato pihakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
197已對照

一百九十七、肺者:是分為三十二塊肉片的肺肉。它依顏色是紅色的,是不太熟的優曇婆羅果之色。依形狀,如切得不齊的厚餅片之形。在裡面,由於在沒有所吃、所飲之物時,被升起的業生火之熱所衝擊,[它]如嚼過的稻草團一般,無味、無食素。依方位,生於上方。依處所,在身內兩乳之間,從上覆蓋著心與肝,垂掛而住。依界限,以肺之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

197. Papphāsanti dvattiṃsamaṃsakhaṇḍappabhedaṃ papphāsamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ nātipakkaudumbaraphalavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato visamacchinnabahalapūvakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Abbhantare asitapītānaṃ abhāve uggatena kammajatejusmānā abbhāhatattā saṃkhāditapalālapiṇḍamiva nirasaṃ nirojaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ antare hadayañca yakanañca upari chādetvā olambantaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato papphāsabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
198已對照

一百九十八、腸者:是男子三十二肘、女子二十八肘、在二十一處彎折的腸管。它依顏色是白色的,是摻砂石灰之色。依形狀,如砍去了頭、盤曲著放在血槽中的蛇之形。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,由於上面繫於頸根、下面繫於糞道,所以在身內以頸根與糞道為兩端而住。依界限,以腸之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

198. Antanti purisassa dvattiṃsahatthā itthiyā aṭṭhavīsatihatthā ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi. Tadetaṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ sakkharasudhāvaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato lohitadoṇiyaṃ ābhujitvā ṭhapitasīsacchinnasappasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā ca karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsamaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
199緬 1.250已對照

一百九十九、腸間膜者:是諸腸曲之處的繫帶。它依顏色是白色的,是白睡蓮(dakasītalika)根之色。依形狀,也正是白睡蓮根之形。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,猶如拉動傀儡之時,傀儡的線把傀儡的諸木板[系在一起]一般,[它]把諸腸曲系在一起,令作鋤、斧等活計的人的[諸腸曲]不滑落;又如在擦腳繩墊的圈環中間縫合起來的繩子一般,住於二十一個腸曲之間。依界限,以腸間膜之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

199. Antaguṇanti antabhogaṭṭhānesu bandhanaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ dakasītalikamūlavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dakasītalikamūlasaṇṭhānameva. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato kuddālapharasukammādīni karontānaṃ yantākaḍḍhanakāle yantasuttakamiva yantaphalakāni antabhoge ekato agaḷante ābandhitvā pādapuñchanarajjumaṇḍalakassa antarā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitarajjukā viya ekavīsatiyā antabhogānaṃ antarā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antaguṇabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
200已對照

二百、胃中物者:是在胃中的所吃、所飲、所嚼、所嘗之物。它依顏色是所吞食之食物的顏色。依形狀,如鬆鬆地系在濾水布中的米之形。依方位,生於上方。依處所,住於胃中。

200. Udariyanti udare bhavaṃ asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato parissāvane sithilabaddhataṇḍulasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udare ṭhitaṃ.
緬 1.251已對照

所謂胃,是猶如兩端被絞擰的溼布中間所生起的鼓包一般的腸膜,外面光滑,裡面似裹過肉的穢渣的髒外衣的絨毛,也可以說似腐爛的波羅蜜果皮的內面;在那裡,塔果吒迦(takkoṭaka)蟲、蚯蚓、多羅髓蟲、針口蟲、布絲蟲等等三十二族類之別的蟲,紛亂擾攘、成群結隊地遊行而棲居;它們在沒有飲食等時,便跳起號叫,衝撞心肉;在吞嚥飲食等時,又仰起頭來,急急忙忙地搶奪最先吞下的兩三口;它是那些蟲的產房、廁所、病房與冢間。在那裡,猶如在旃陀羅村門口的汙水坑中,於炎熱時節天降大雨時,被水衝來的尿、糞、皮、骨、腱的碎塊、唾、涕、血等種種屍穢之物落下,與泥水攪混,過了兩三天便生出成群的蟲,被日曬的熱力蒸得腐爛,上面冒出泡沫與水泡,顏色深青,極其惡臭可憎,成為既不值得走近、也不值得一看的樣子而住,更不必說去嗅或去嚐了;正是如此,種種飲食等被牙齒之杵舂碎,被舌頭之手翻轉,被唾液涎沫粘裹,當下就失去了色、香、味等的美好,似織工的漿糊與狗的嘔吐物,落下之後,被膽汁、痰、風所包裹,被胃火的熱力蒸得腐爛,滿是成群的蟲,一層層地冒出泡沫與水泡,成為極其汙穢、惡臭、可憎之狀而住。僅僅聽聞它,也會對飲食等生起不可意之感,更不必說以慧眼觀察了。而落在那裡的飲食等分為五分:一分被蟲所吃,一分被胃火所燒,一分成為尿,一分[成為]糞,一分成為精汁而滋養血、肉等。

Udaraṃ nāma ubhato nippīḷiyamānassa allasāṭakassa majjhe sañjātaphoṭakasadisaṃ antapaṭalaṃ, bahi maṭṭhaṃ, anto maṃsakasambupaliveṭhanakiliṭṭhapāvārakapupphakasadisaṃ, kuthitapanasatacassa abbhantarasadisantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati, yattha takkoṭakā gaṇḍuppādakā tālahīrakā sūcimukhakā paṭatantasuttakā iccevamādidvattiṃsakulappabhedā kimayo ākulabyākulā saṇḍasaṇḍacārino hutvā nivasanti, ye pānabhojanādimhi avijjamāne ullaṅghitvā viravantā hadayamaṃsaṃ abhihananti, pānabhojanādiajjhoharaṇavelāyañca uddhaṃmukhā hutvā paṭhamajjhohaṭe dve tayo ālope turitaturitā viluppanti, yaṃ tesaṃ kimīnaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hoti. Yattha seyyathāpi nāma caṇḍālagāmadvāre candanikāya nidāghasamaye thūlaphusitake deve vassante udakena vuyhamānaṃ muttakarīsacammaaṭṭhinhārukhaṇḍakheḷasiṅghāṇikālohitappabhutinānākuṇapajātaṃ nipatitvā kaddamodakāluḷitaṃ dvīhatīhaccayena sañjātakimikulaṃ sūriyātapasantāpavegakuthitaṃ upari pheṇapupphuḷake muñcantaṃ abhinīlavaṇṇaṃ paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ neva upagantuṃ, na daṭṭhuṃ araharūpataṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati, pageva ghāyituṃ vā sāyituṃ vā, evameva nānappakāraṃ pānabhojanādidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattitakheḷalālāpalibuddhaṃ taṅkhaṇavigatavaṇṇagandharasādisampadaṃ tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisaṃ nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitaṃ hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitaṃ kimikulākulaṃ uparūpari pheṇapupphuḷakāni muñcantaṃ paramakasambuduggandhajegucchabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati. Yaṃ sutvāpi pānabhojanādīsu amanuññatā saṇṭhāti, pageva paññācakkhunā avaloketvā. Yattha ca patitaṃ pānabhojanādi pañcadhā vivekaṃ gacchati, ekaṃ bhāgaṃ pāṇakā khādanti, ekaṃ bhāgaṃ udaraggi jhāpeti, eko bhāgo muttaṃ hoti, eko bhāgo karīsaṃ, eko bhāgo rasabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā soṇitamaṃsādīni upabrūhayati.
已對照

依界限,以胃膜與胃中物之分為界限,這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

Paricchedato udarapaṭalena ceva udariyabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
201已對照

二百零一、糞者:即大便。它依顏色大多是所吞食之食物的顏色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀。依方位,生於下方。依處所,住於熟藏中。所謂熟藏,是在臍下與脊骨根之間、腸的末端,高約八指,似竹管;在那裡,猶如落在高處地面的雨水向下滲流,充滿低處地面而住,正是如此,凡落入生藏中的飲食等,被胃火一再煮得冒泡而熟,如在磨石上研過一般成為細軟之狀,順著腸道一再滲流而下,被壓緊,如塞進竹節中的黃泥一般積聚而住。依界限,以熟藏膜與糞之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

201. Karīsanti vaccaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato yebhuyyena ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇameva hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato pakkāsaye ṭhitaṃ. Pakkāsayo nāma heṭṭhānābhi-piṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānaṃ antare antāvasāne ubbedhena aṭṭhaṅgulamatto veḷunāḷikasadiso, yattha seyyathāpi nāma upari bhūmibhāge patitaṃ vassodakaṃ ogaḷitvā heṭṭhā bhūmibhāgaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati, evameva yaṃkiñci āmāsaye patitaṃ pānabhojanādikaṃ udaragginā pheṇuddehakaṃ pakkaṃ pakkaṃ nisadāya pisitamiva saṇhabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā antabilena ogaḷitvā ogaḷitvā omadditvā veḷupabbe pakkhipamānapaṇḍumattikā viya sannicitaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pakkāsayapaṭalena ceva karīsabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
202緬 1.252已對照

二百零二、腦者:是在頭顱內的髓之堆。它依顏色是白色的,是菌蕈團的顏色;也可以說是尚未成為凝乳的變質乳汁之色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀。依方位,生於上方。依處所,在頭顱內,沿著四條縫合線,猶如合放在一起的四個麵糰一般聚合而住。依界限,以頭顱的內壁與腦之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

202. Matthaluṅganti sīsakaṭāhabbhantare ṭhitamiñjarāsi. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ ahicchattakapiṇḍavaṇṇaṃ. Dadhibhāvaṃ asampattaṃ duṭṭhakhīravaṇṇantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbinimagge nissāya samodhānetvā ṭhapitā cattāro piṭṭhapiṇḍā viya samohitaṃ tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato sīsakaṭāhassa abbhantaratalehi ceva matthaluṅgabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
203已對照

二百零三、膽汁者:膽汁有兩種,即固著膽汁與不固著膽汁。此中,固著膽汁依顏色是濃稠的摩頭迦油之色;不固著膽汁是枯萎的阿姑離(ākuli)花之色。依形狀,兩者都是其處所的形狀。依方位,固著膽汁生於上方,另一種生於兩方。依處所,不固著膽汁除了頭髮、體毛、牙齒、指甲的無肉之處以及堅硬幹燥的皮之外,如水上的油滴一般遍佈其餘的身體而住;當它紊亂時,眼睛變黃、旋轉,身體顫抖、發癢。固著膽汁住於膽囊中——那膽囊在心與肺之間,依附肝肉而立住,似大絲瓜的瓜囊;當它紊亂時,眾生便成為發狂者,心顛倒,捨棄慚愧,作不應作的,說不應說的,想不應想的。依界限,以膽汁之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

203. Pittanti dve pittāni baddhapittañca abaddhapittañca. Tattha baddhapittaṃ vaṇṇato bahalamadhukatelavaṇṇaṃ. Abaddhapittaṃ milātaākulipupphavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato baddhapittaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato abaddhapittaṃ ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca udakamiva telabindu avasesasarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite akkhīni pītakāni honti, bhamanti, gattaṃ kampati, kaṇḍūyati. Baddhapittaṃ hadayapapphāsānaṃ antare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya patiṭṭhite mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite sattā ummattakā honti, vipallatthacittā hirottappaṃ chaḍḍetvā akātabbaṃ karonti, abhāsitabbaṃ bhāsanti, acintitabbaṃ cintenti. Paricchedato pittabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
204已對照

二百零四、痰者:是身內滿一缽他(pattha)之量的痰。它依顏色是白色的,是那伽跋拉(nāgabalā)葉汁之色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀。依方位,生於上方。依處所,住於胃膜上。它在吞嚥飲食等之時,猶如水中的水苔浮萍,當木片或瓦片落下時,被切開分為兩邊,又再覆蓋[回來]而住;正是如此,在飲食等落下時,[它]被切開分為兩邊,又再覆蓋[回來]而住。當它減弱時,胃如熟透的瘡、如腐壞的雞蛋一般,成為極可憎、有屍臭的;由從那裡升起的氣味,噯氣與口也成為惡臭的,似腐爛的屍體;那人便落到應被說「走開,你散發著惡臭」的地步。而當它增長而成為濃厚時,便如廁所的蓋板一般,把屍臭封閉在胃膜之內而住。依界限,以痰之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

204. Semhanti sarīrabbhantare ekapatthapūrappamāṇaṃ semhaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ nāgabalāpaṇṇarasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udarapaṭale ṭhitaṃ. Yaṃ pānabhojanādiajjhoharaṇakāle seyyathāpi nāma udake sevālapaṇakaṃ kaṭṭhe vā kathale vā patante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati, evameva pānabhojanādimhi nipatante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati, yamhi ca mandībhūte pakkagaṇḍo viya pūtikukkuṭaṇḍamiva ca udaraṃ paramajegucchaṃ kuṇapagandhaṃ hoti, tato uggatena ca gandhena uddekopi mukhampi duggandhaṃ pūtikuṇapasadisaṃ hoti. So ca puriso apehi duggandhaṃ vāyasīti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, yañca vaḍḍhitvā bahalattamāpannaṃ pidhānaphalakamiva vaccakuṭiyaṃ udarapaṭalassa abbhantareyeva kuṇapagandhaṃ sannirumbhitvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato semhabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
205緬 1.253已對照

二百零五、膿者:是依腐壞的血而轉起的膿。它依顏色是枯黃葉之色;而在死屍中,是腐壞的濃稠米湯之色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀。依方位,存在於兩方。依處所,膿沒有它能積聚而住的固定處所;凡身體的某處被樹樁、荊棘、兵器、火焰等所傷,血在那裡凝結而化膿,或者生起瘡、癤等,[膿]就在那些地方而住。依界限,以膿之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

205. Pubboti pūtilohitavasena pavattapubbaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇo. Matasarīre pana pūtibahalācāmavaṇṇo hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu hoti. Okāsato pana pubbassa okāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so sannicito tiṭṭheyya, yatra yatra khāṇukaṇṭakapaharaṇaggijālādīhi abhihate sarīrappadese lohitaṃ saṇṭhahitvā paccati, gaṇḍapīḷakādayo vā uppajjanti, tatra tatra tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pubbabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
206已對照

二百零六、血者:血有兩種,即積聚的血與流動的血。此中,積聚的血依顏色是熬過的濃稠紫膠汁之色;流動的血是清澈的紫膠汁之色。依形狀,兩者都是其處所的形狀。依方位,積聚的血生於上方,另一種生於兩方。依處所,流動的血除了頭髮、體毛、牙齒、指甲的無肉之處以及堅硬幹燥的皮之外,順著脈管之網遍佈一切執受的身體而住。積聚的血充滿肝所在之處的下部,滿一缽他之量,一點一點地滴在心、腎、肺之上,潤溼著腎、心、肝、肺而住;因為當它不潤溼腎、心等時,眾生便口渴。依界限,以血之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

206. Lohitanti dve lohitāni sannicitalohitañca saṃsaraṇalohitañca. Tattha sannicitalohitaṃ vaṇṇato nipakkabahalalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ acchalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato sannicitalohitaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Itaraṃ dvisu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca dhamanijālānusārena sabbaṃ upādiṇṇasarīraṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ. Sannicitalohitaṃ yakanaṭṭhānassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ pūretvā ekapatthapūramattaṃ hadayavakkapapphāsānaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharantaṃ vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Tasmiṃ hi vakkahadayādīni atemente sattā pipāsitā honti. Paricchedato lohitabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
207緬 1.254已對照

二百零七、汗者:是從毛孔等處流出的水界。它依顏色是清澈的芝麻油之色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,汗沒有固定的處所,[使]它能如血一般常時而住;而當身體因火的炙熱、日的炙熱、時節的變化等而發熱時,它便如剛從水中拔出的、斷口不齊的一束蓮藕、蓮莖、拘物頭莖一般,從一切發孔、毛孔的孔口流出;所以它的形狀也應依發孔、毛孔的孔口而知。而把握汗的瑜伽者,應正就[汗]充滿發孔、毛孔的孔口而住[之狀]來作意汗。依界限,以汗之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

207. Sedoti lomakūpādīhi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu. So vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sedassokāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so lohitaṃ viya sadā tiṭṭheyya. Yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvikārādīhi sarīraṃ santapati, tadā udakato abbūḷhamattavisamacchinnabhisamuḷālakumudanāḷakalāpo viya sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharati, tasmā tassa saṇṭhānampi kesalomakūpavivarānaññeva vasena veditabbaṃ. Sedapariggaṇhakena ca yoginā kesalomakūpavivare pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva sedo manasi kātabbo. Paricchedato sedabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
已對照

脂肪者:是凝固的油脂。它依顏色是切開的鬱金之色。依形狀,首先,在胖身者[身上],如放在皮與肉之間的鬱金色都古拉細布碎片之形;在瘦身者[身上],依附於小腿肉、大腿肉、依附脊骨的背肉、腹圍之肉——依附於這些,如折成兩疊、三疊放著的鬱金色都古拉細布碎片之形。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,在胖者[身上]遍佈全身,在瘦者[身上]依附小腿肉等而住;它雖也算作油脂,但由於極可憎,[人們]既不取它作頭油,也不取它作鼻油等用。依界限,以下面的肉、上面的皮、橫向以脂肪之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

Medoti thinasineho. So vaṇṇato phālitahaliddivaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato thūlasarīrassa tāva cammamaṃsantare ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno hoti. Kisasarīrassa jaṅghamaṃsaṃ ūrumaṃsaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakanissitaṃ piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ udaravaṭṭimaṃsanti etāni nissāya diguṇatiguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato thūlassa sakalasarīraṃ pharitvā kisassa jaṅghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito, yaṃ sinehasaṅkhaṃ gatampi paramajegucchattā neva muddhani telatthāya, na nāsatelādīnamatthāya gaṇhanti. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ medabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
208已對照

二百零八、淚者:是從眼中流出的水界。它依顏色是清澈的芝麻油之色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀。依方位,生於上方。依處所,住於眼窩中。而它並不如膽汁之於膽囊那樣,常時積聚在眼窩中而住;而是當眾生生起喜悅而放聲大笑,生起憂而哭泣、悲嘆,或吃了那樣的不調之食,以及當他們的眼睛被煙、塵、土等所侵擾時,那時它便由這些喜悅、憂、不相宜的食物與時節而等起,充滿眼窩而住,或者流出。而把握淚的瑜伽者,應正就[淚]充滿眼窩而住[之狀]來把握。依界限,以淚之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

208. Assūti akkhīhi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu. Taṃ vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato akkhikūpakesu ṭhitaṃ. Na cetaṃ pittakosake pittamiva akkhikūpakesu sadā sannicitaṃ tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā somanassajātā mahāhasitaṃ hasanti, domanassajātā rodanti paridevanti, tathārūpaṃ vā visamāhāraṃ āhārenti, yadā ca nesaṃ akkhīni dhūmarajapaṃsukādīhi abhihaññanti. Tadā etehi somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhārautūhi samuṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Assupariggaṇhakena ca yoginā akkhikūpake pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbaṃ. Paricchedato assubhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
209緬 1.255已對照

二百零九、膏者:是融化的油脂。它依顏色是椰子油之色;也可以說是灑在米湯上的油之色。依形狀,如沐浴時在清水上面四處漂轉的油滴散開之形。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,大多住於手掌、手背、腳掌、腳背、鼻翼、額、肩頭。而它並不常時在這些處所融化而住;而是當這些部位因火的炙熱、日的炙熱、時節不相宜、諸界不相宜而發熱時,它便如沐浴時清水上散開的油滴一般,在那裡此處彼處流動。依界限,以膏之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

209. Vasāti vilīnasineho. Sā vaṇṇato nāḷikeratelavaṇṇā. Ācāme āsittatelavaṇṇātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato nhānakāle pasannaudakassa upari paribbhamantasinehabinduvisaṭasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato yebhuyyena hatthatalahatthapiṭṭhipādatalapādapiṭṭhināsapuṭanalāṭaaṃsakūṭesu ṭhitā. Na cesā etesu okāsesu sadā vilīnāva hutvā tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvisabhāgadhātuvisabhāgehi te padesā usmājātā honti, tadā tattha nhānakāle pasannaudakūpari sinehabinduvisaṭo viya ito cito ca sañcarati. Paricchedato vasābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
210已對照

二百一十、唾者:是口內混有泡沫的水界。它依顏色是白色的,是泡沫之色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀;也可以說是泡沫之形。依方位,生於上方。依處所,從兩頰的內側下來,住於舌上。而它並不常時積聚在這裡而住;而是當眾生看見或憶起那樣的食物,或把熱、苦、辣、鹹、酸的任何東西放入口中,或當他們心中不適,或對某物生起嫌惡時,那時唾便生起,從兩頰的內側下來,留在舌上。它在舌尖是稀的,在舌根是稠的;放入口中的米片、米粒或其他任何可嚼之物,它都能潤溼,如在河岸沙洲上挖出的小坑中的水一般,不會耗盡。依界限,以唾之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

210. Kheḷoti antomukhe pheṇamissā āpodhātu. So vaṇṇato seto pheṇavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Pheṇasaṇṭhānotipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Disato uparimāya disāya jāto. Okāsato ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya ṭhito. Na cesa ettha sadā sannicito hutvā tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā tathārūpamāhāraṃ passanti vā saranti vā, uṇhatittakaṭukaloṇambilānaṃ vā kiñci mukhe ṭhapenti, yadā vā nesaṃ hadayaṃ āgilāyati, kismiñci deva vā jigucchā uppajjati, tadā kheḷo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya saṇṭhāti. Aggajivhāya cesa tanuko hoti, mūlajivhāya bahalo, mukhe pakkhittañca puthukaṃ vā taṇḍulaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci khādanīyaṃ nadīpuline khatakūpakasalilaṃ viya parikkhayaṃ agacchantova temetuṃ samattho hoti. Paricchedato kheḷabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
211已對照

二百一十一、涕者:是從腦流出的不淨物。它依顏色是嫩多羅果核之仁的顏色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀。依方位,生於上方。依處所,充滿鼻孔而住。而它並不常時積聚在這裡而住;而是猶如有人把凝乳包在蓮葉中,在下面以刺刺穿,於是凝乳之汁便從那孔漏出而落在外面;正是如此,當眾生哭泣,或依不相宜的食物與時節而諸界擾亂生起時,那時頭內已成為腐壞之痰的腦便漏出,從上顎頂部的孔道下降,充滿鼻孔而住,或者流出。而把握涕的瑜伽者,應正就[涕]充滿鼻孔而住[之狀]來把握。依界限,以涕之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

211. Siṅghāṇikāti matthaluṅgato paggharaṇakaasuci. Sā vaṇṇato taruṇatālaṭṭhimiñjavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātā. Okāsato nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitā. Na cesā ettha sadā sannicitā hutvā tiṭṭhati, atha kho yathā nāma puriso paduminipatte dadhiṃ bandhitvā heṭṭhā kaṇṭakena vijjheyya, athānena chiddena dadhimuttaṃ gaḷitvā bahi pateyya, evameva yadā sattā rodanti, visabhāgāhārautuvasena vā sañjātadhātukhobhā honti, tadā anto sīsato pūtisemhabhāvamāpannaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ gaḷitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Siṅghāṇikā pariggaṇhakena ca yoginā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbā. Paricchedato siṅghāṇikābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassā sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
212緬 1.256已對照

二百一十二、關節滑液者:是身體諸關節之內的黏滑屍穢。它依顏色是迦尼迦羅樹膠之色。依形狀,是其處所的形狀。依方位,生於兩方。依處所,成辦潤滑諸骨節的作用,住於一百八十個關節之內。而凡是它少的人,當他起立、坐下、前進、後退、屈、伸時,骨頭咯咯作響,[他]走動時如同發出彈指之聲;走了一由旬、兩由旬之遠的路,風界便紊亂,肢體便疼痛。而凡是它多的人,在起立、坐下等時骨頭不咯咯作響,即使走了長遠的路,風界也不紊亂,肢體也不疼痛。依界限,以關節滑液之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

212. Lasikāti sarīrasandhīnaṃ abbhantare picchilakuṇapaṃ. Sā vaṇṇato kaṇikāraniyyāsavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā asītisatasandhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitā. Yassa cesā mandā hoti, tassa uṭṭhahantassa nisīdantassa abhikkamantassa paṭikkamantassa samiñjantassa pasārentassa aṭṭhikāni kaṭakaṭāyanti, accharāsaddaṃ karonto viya sañcarati. Ekayojanadviyojanamattaṃ addhānaṃ gatassa vāyodhātu kuppati, gattāni dukkhanti. Yassa pana bahukā honti, tassa uṭṭhānanisajjādīsu na aṭṭhīni kaṭakaṭāyanti, dīghampi addhānaṃ gatassa na vāyodhātu kuppati, na gattāni dukkhanti. Paricchedato lasikābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassā sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
213已對照

二百一十三、尿者:即尿液。它依顏色是豆灰水之色。依形狀,如口朝下放置的水甕內所盛之水的形狀。依方位,生於下方。依處所,住於膀胱之內。所謂膀胱,是稱為膀胱囊[的東西]。在那裡,猶如把無口的滲水甕放入汙水坑中,汙水坑的汁液便滲入[甕中],而它的入路卻看不出來;正是如此,尿從身體滲入[膀胱],而它的入路看不出來,出路卻是明顯的。而當它充滿了尿時,眾生便有「我們要小便」的努力。依界限,以膀胱之內與尿之分為界限——這是它的同分界限。而異分界限則與頭髮相同。

213. Muttanti muttarasaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato māsakhārodakavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato adhomukhaṭṭhapitaudakakumbhaabbhantaragataudakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato vatthissa abbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Vatthi nāma vatthi puṭo vuccati. Yattha seyyathāpi candanikāya pakkhitte amukhe ravaṇaghaṭe candanikāraso pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, evameva sarīrato muttaṃ pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, nikkhamanamaggo pana pākaṭo hoti. Yamhi ca muttassa bharite passāvaṃ karomāti sattānaṃ āyūhanaṃ hoti. Paricchedato vatthiabbhantarena ceva muttabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
214緬 1.257已對照

二百一十四、如是,依顏色、形狀、方位、處所、界限辨定了頭髮等諸部分之後,依「依次第、不太快」等方法,依顏色、形狀、氣味、所依、處所以五種[方式]作意「厭惡、厭惡」者,在超越施設之終,猶如有眼之人觀看以一根線串起的三十二種顏色之花的花鬘時,一切花都如不分先後地顯現,正是如此,當他以「在這身中有頭髮」等[方式]觀察這身體時,那一切法都不分先後地顯現。因此在作意善巧之論中說:「因為對初學者來說,當他作意『頭髮』時,作意便前行,直到觸及『尿』這最後的部分才停住。」

而如果他也把作意引向外部,那麼在一切部分都如是顯現之後,四處遊走的人、畜生等便捨去了眾生的形相,唯以部分之堆[的樣子]現起;被他們吞嚥的飲食等,也如同被投入部分之堆中一般現起。

於是,當他依次第捨棄等[方式]一再作意「厭惡、厭惡」時,安止便次第生起。此中,頭髮等依顏色、形狀、方位、處所、界限而現起,是取相;依一切行相以厭惡而現起,是似相。當他習行它、修習它時,依所說的方式,如在諸不淨業處中一樣,唯以初禪[之相]生起安止。

凡只有一個部分顯現的人,或者在一個部分上得到安止之後,不再於另一[部分]上致力的人,對他只生起一個[初禪]。而凡有多個部分顯現的人,或者在一個[部分]上得到禪那之後,又於另一[部分]上也致力的人,對他則如末羅迦長老那樣,依部分的數目生起諸初禪。

相傳,那位具壽握著長部誦者阿跋亞長老的手,說了「賢友阿跋亞,你且學取這個問題」之後,說道:「末羅迦長老是於三十二部分中的三十二初禪之得者。他若夜裡入一[禪]、白天入一[禪],要過半月有餘才再[輪]到;而若每天入一[禪],要過一月有餘才再[輪]到。」

這業處雖是如是依初禪而成就,然而由於是依念之力在顏色、形狀等上成就,所以稱為「身至念」。

而勤修這身至唸的比丘,是堪忍不樂與樂者,不樂不能勝他,他一再地制勝已生的不樂而住;是堪忍怖畏與驚駭者,怖畏與驚駭不能勝他,他一再地制勝已生的怖畏與驚駭而住;他能忍寒、熱……乃至……成為能忍受奪命的[諸受]者(《中部》3.159)。依於頭髮等的顏色之別,他成為四禪之得者。他通達六神通(《中部》3.159)。

因此,智者確實應當不放逸地勤修

這如是具眾多功德利益的身至念。

這是關於身至唸的詳說之門。

214. Evañhi kesādike koṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā anupubbato nātisīghatotiādinā nayena vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlāti manasikaroto paṇṇattisamatikkamāvasāne seyyathāpi cakkhumato purisassa dvattiṃsavaṇṇānaṃ kusumānaṃ ekasuttakaganthitaṃ mālaṃ olokentassa sabbapupphāni apubbāpariyamiva pākaṭāni honti, evameva atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesāti imaṃ kāyaṃ olokentassa sabbe te dhammā apubbāpariyāva pākaṭā honti. Tena vuttaṃ manasikārakosallakathāyaṃ ‘‘ādikammikassa hi kesāti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā muttanti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
Sace pana bahiddhāpi manasikāraṃ upasaṃharati, athassa evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu pākaṭībhūtesu āhiṇḍantā manussatiracchānādayo sattākāraṃ vijahitvā koṭṭhāsarāsivaseneva upaṭṭhahanti, tehi ca ajjhohariyamānaṃ pānabhojanādi koṭṭhāsarāsimhi pakkhipamānamiva upaṭṭhāti.
Athassa anupubbamuñcanādivasena paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlāti punappunaṃ manasikaroto anukkamena appanā uppajjati. Tattha kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ uggahanimittaṃ. Sabbākārato paṭikkūlavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Taṃ āsevato bhāvayato vuttanayena asubhakammaṭṭhānesu viya paṭhamajjhānavaseneva appanā uppajjati.
Sā yassa ekova koṭṭhāso pākaṭo hoti, ekasmiṃ vā koṭṭhāse appanaṃ patvā puna aññasmiṃ yogaṃ na karoti, tassa ekāva uppajjati. Yassa pana aneke koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, ekasmiṃ vā jhānaṃ patvā puna aññasmiṃpi yogaṃ karoti, tassa mallakattherassa viya koṭṭhāsagaṇanāya paṭhamajjhānāni nibbattanti.
So kirāyasmā dīghabhāṇakaabhayattheraṃ hatthe gahetvā ‘‘āvuso abhaya, imaṃ tāva pañhaṃ uggaṇhāhī’’ti vatvā āha – ‘‘mallakatthero dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsesu dvattiṃsāya paṭhamajjhānānaṃ lābhī. Sace rattiṃ ekaṃ, divā ekaṃ samāpajjati, atirekaddhamāsena puna sampajjati, sace pana devasikaṃ ekaṃ samāpajjati, atirekamāsena puna sampajjatī’’ti.
Evaṃ paṭhamajjhānavasena ijjhamānampi cetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīsu satibalena ijjhanato kāyagatāsatīti vuccati.
Imañca kāyagatāsatimanuyutto bhikkhu aratiratisaho hoti, na ca naṃ arati sahati, uppannaṃ aratiṃ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati. Bhayabheravasaho hoti, na ca naṃ bhayabheravaṃ sahati, uppannaṃ bhayabheravaṃ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati. Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa …pe… pāṇaharānaṃ adhivāsakajātiko hoti (ma. ni. 3.159). Kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇabhedaṃ nissāya catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ lābhī hoti. Cha abhiññā paṭivijjhati (ma. ni. 3.159).
Tasmā have appamatto, anuyuñjetha paṇḍito;
Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, imaṃ kāyagatāsatinti.
Idaṃ kāyagatāsatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
已對照

入出息念論

Ānāpānassatikathā
215已對照

二百一十五、現在,世尊以「諸比丘,這入出息念定也[是這樣]:若修習、多作,正是寂靜的、殊勝的、無澆灌的、樂的住,並且立即使一再生起的惡不善法消失、平息」如是稱讚之後——

「諸比丘,入出息念定如何修習、如何多作,正是寂靜的、殊勝的、無澆灌的、樂的住,並且立即使一再生起的惡不善法消失、平息呢?諸比丘,在此,比丘前往林野、或前往樹下、或前往空閒處,結跏趺而坐,保持其身正直,使念現起於面前。他只是具念地入息,具念地出息。入息長時,了知『我入息長』;出息長時……乃至……入息短時……乃至……出息短時,了知『我出息短』。他學:『我將覺知全身而入息』;他學:『我將覺知全身而出息』。他學:『我將令身行止息而入息』;他學:『我將令身行止息而出息』。覺知喜……覺知樂……覺知心行……令心行止息……覺知心……令心喜悅……令心得定……令心解脫……隨觀無常……隨觀離貪……隨觀滅。他學:『我將隨觀舍離而入息』;他學:『我將隨觀舍離而出息』。」——

如是所開示的具十六事的入出息念業處,它的修習之法[現在]已輪到了。而由於那[修習之法]唯有隨順聖典的釋義而說,才得一切行相圓滿,因此,此中[所作]的是以聖典釋義為前導的解說。

215. Idāni yaṃ taṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ayampi kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi bhāvito bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro, uppannuppanne ca pāpake akusale dhamme ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsitvā –
216緬 1.259已對照

二百一十六、首先,在「諸比丘,入出息念定如何修習」這裡,「如何(kathaṃ)」是想要以種種方式詳說入出息念定的修習而[作]的問。「諸比丘,入出息念定……修習(bhāvito ca bhikkhave ānāpānassatisamādhi)」,是由想要以種種方式詳說而對所問之法的指示。於「如何多作……乃至……平息(kathaṃ bahulīkato…pe… vūpasameti)」這裡,也是這個方法。此中,「修習(bhāvito)」者:即令生起、或令增長。「入出息念定(ānāpānassatisamādhi)」者:與攝取入出息的念相應的定。或在入出息念中的定,[即]入出息念定。「多作(bahulīkato)」者:即一再地作。「正是寂靜的、殊勝的(santo ceva paṇīto ca)」者:即正是寂靜的,也正是殊勝的。於兩處都應知以「正(eva)」字作限定。這說的是什麼?因為這[入出息念定]並不像不淨業處那樣——[不淨業處]唯依通達而是寂靜的、殊勝的,然而由於所緣粗顯、由於所緣可厭,就所緣而言既不寂靜,也不殊勝——[它]不以任何理趣而是不寂靜的或不殊勝的;而是由於所緣的寂靜性,它也是寂靜的、平息的、寂滅的;由於稱為通達的支的寂靜性,也[是寂靜的]。由於所緣的殊勝性,它也是殊勝的、不令生厭足的;由於支的殊勝性,也[是殊勝的]。因此說「正是寂靜的、殊勝的」。

而在「無澆灌的、樂的住(asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro)」這裡,它沒有澆灌,故為「無澆灌的」;即未被澆灑的、不混雜的、各別的、獨有的。此中沒有由遍作或近行而來的寂靜性,而是從最初的注意起,便以自己的自性而是寂靜的、殊勝的,此是其義。而某些[師]說:「無澆灌的」即未被澆灑的、有滋養素的、以自性而為甘美的。如是應知,這[入出息念定]是無澆灌的;並且由於在每一安止剎那都導向獲得身的與心的樂,[故]是樂的住。「一再生起的(uppannuppanne)」者:即一一未被鎮伏的。「惡(pāpake)」者:即低劣的。「不善法(akusale dhamme)」者:即由不善巧所生的諸法。「立即使……消失(ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti)」者:即於剎那間使[它們]消失、鎮伏。「平息(vūpasameti)」者:即善加平息。或者,是說由於是決擇分的,依次達到聖道的增長時,便正斷[它們],令[它們]安息。

而此中簡要之義為:諸比丘,入出息念定以什麼方式、以什麼行相、以什麼方法修習,以什麼方式多作,正是寂靜的……乃至……平息?

‘‘Kathaṃ bhāvito ca, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi kathaṃ bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro, uppannuppanne ca pāpake akusale dhamme ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasameti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā, so satova assasati sato passasati. Dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ vā passasanto…pe… rassaṃ vā assasanto…pe… rassaṃ vā passasanto rassaṃ passasāmīti pajānāti. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmīti sikkhati. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī passasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Pītipaṭisaṃvedī… sukhapaṭisaṃvedī… cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī… passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ… cittapaṭisaṃvedī… abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ… samādahaṃ cittaṃ… vimocayaṃ cittaṃ … aniccānupassī… virāgānupassī… nirodhānupassī. Paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmīti sikkhati. Paṭinissaggānupassī passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti –
Evaṃ soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tassa bhāvanānayo anuppatto. So pana yasmā pāḷivaṇṇanānusāreneva vuccamāno sabbākāraparipūro hoti. Tasmā ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanāpubbaṅgamo niddeso.
216. Kathaṃ bhāvito ca, bhikkhave, ānāpānassati samādhīti ettha tāva kathanti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanaṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Bhāvito ca bhikkhave ānāpānassatisamādhīti nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāya puṭṭhadhammanidassanaṃ. Kathaṃ bahulīkato…pe… vūpasametīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tattha bhāvitoti uppādito vaḍḍhito vā. Ānāpānassatisamādhīti ānāpānapariggāhikāya satiyā saddhiṃ sampayutto samādhi. Ānāpānassatiyaṃ vā samādhi ānāpānassatisamādhi. Bahulīkatoti punappunaṃ kato. Santoceva paṇīto cāti santo ceva paṇīto ceva. Ubhayattha eva saddena niyamo veditabbo. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayañhi yathā asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ kevalaṃ paṭivedhavasena santañca paṇītañca, oḷārikārammaṇattā pana paṭikkūlārammaṇattā ca ārammaṇavasena neva santaṃ na paṇītaṃ, na evaṃ kenaci pariyāyena asanto vā apaṇīto vā, atha kho ārammaṇasantatāyapi santo vūpasanto nibbuto, paṭivedhasaṅkhātaaṅgasantatāyapi. Ārammaṇapaṇītatāyapi paṇīto atittikaro, aṅgapaṇītatāyapīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘santo ceva paṇīto cā’’ti.
Asecanako ca sukho ca vihāroti ettha pana nāssa secananti asecanako, anāsittako abbokiṇṇo pāṭiyekko āveṇiko. Natthi ettha parikammena vā upacārena vā santatā. Ādisamannāhārato pabhuti attano sabhāveneva santo ca paṇīto cāti attho. Keci pana asecanakoti anāsittako ojavanto sabhāveneva madhuroti vadanti. Evaṃ ayaṃ asecanako ca, appitappitakkhaṇe kāyikacetasikasukhapaṭilābhāya saṃvattanato sukho ca vihāroti veditabbo. Uppannuppanneti avikkhambhite avikkhambhite. Pāpaketi lāmake. Akusale dhammeti akosallasambhūte dhamme. Ṭhānaso antaradhāpetīti khaṇeneva antaradhāpeti vikkhambheti. Vūpasametīti suṭṭhu upasameti. Nibbedhabhāgiyattā vā anupubbena ariyamaggavuddhippatto samucchindati, paṭippassambhetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho. Bhikkhave, kena pakārena kenākārena kena vidhinā bhāvito ānāpānassatisamādhi kena pakārena bahulīkato santo ceva…pe… vūpasametīti.
217已對照

二百一十七、現在,為詳說那義,[世尊]說了「諸比丘,在此」等語。此中,「諸比丘,在此,比丘(idha bhikkhave bhikkhu)」者:諸比丘,在此教法中的比丘。此中這「在此(idha)」一詞,顯示能生起一切種類入出息念定之人所依止的教法,並否定其他教法有此性質。因為這已被說過:「諸比丘,唯在此[教法]中才有沙門……乃至……其他外道之說空無[真]沙門。」(《中部》1.139)因此說「在此教法中的比丘」。

217. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārento ‘‘idha, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha idha bhikkhave bhikkhūti bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhi ettha idhasaddo sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139). Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
緬 1.261已對照

「前往林野……乃至……或前往空閒處(araññagato vā…pe… suññāgāragato vā)」——這顯示他攝取適合修習入出息念定的坐臥處。因為這位比丘長夜以來於色等所緣上散逸的心,不願登上入出息念定的所緣,就像套了劣牛的車一樣,只往歧路上跑。因此,就像牧牛人想要馴服那喝盡劣母牛全部乳汁而長大的劣牛犢,便把它從母牛處牽開,在一旁埋下一根大柱,用繩把它系在那裡;於是那牛犢四處掙扎卻無法逃脫,只好靠著那根柱子坐下或臥下——同樣地,這位比丘想要馴服那長夜以來飲色等所緣之味而長成的噁心,也應把它從色等所緣處牽開,進入林野……乃至……或空閒處,在那裡用念之繩把它系在入出息之柱上。這樣,他的心即使四處掙扎,也得不到從前所慣習的所緣,無法掙斷念繩而逃脫,便依近行與安止而靠著那同一所緣坐下、臥下。因此古師們說——

Araññagato vā…pe… suññāgāragato vāti idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhiārammaṇaṃ abhiruhituṃ na icchati, kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati. Tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya, athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā, evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā…pe… suññāgāraṃ vā pavesetvā tattha assāsapassāsathambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
已對照

「猶如此世馴犢之人,把牛犢系在柱上;

‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ damaṃ naro idha;
已對照

應當這樣把自己的心,牢繫於唸的所緣。」(《波羅夷義注》2.165;《長部義注》3.374;《中部義注》1.107)

Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107);
已對照

這樣,這坐臥處便適合於他的修習。因此說「這顯示他攝取適合修習入出息念定的坐臥處」。

Evamassetaṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpana’’nti.
已對照

或者,由於這在業處的類別中作為頂的、是一切知佛、獨覺佛、聲聞弟子證得殊勝與現法樂住之近因的入出息念業處,若不捨離充滿男女象馬等聲音的村落邊,是不易修習的——因為聲是禪那的荊棘;而在沒有村落的林野中,瑜伽行者卻容易攝取這個業處,生起入出息第四禪,以它為基礎,思擇諸行而證得最上果阿羅漢[果]。因此,世尊為顯示適合他的坐臥處,才說了「前往林野」等語。

Atha vā yasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānappabhede muddhabhūtaṃ sabbaññubuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ bhāvetuṃ, saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ sampāpuṇituṃ. Tasmāssa anurūpasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
已對照

因為世尊猶如相地術的老師。就像相地術的老師看了城的地形、仔細詳察之後指示說「在這裡造城吧」,城平安建成之後,他便從王族獲得大禮遇;同樣地,[世尊]詳察了適合瑜伽行者的坐臥處之後指示說「應當在這裡勤修業處」,此後在那裡勤修業處的瑜伽者次第證得阿羅漢[果]時,[世尊]便因「那位世尊真是正等正覺者啊」而獲得大禮遇。

Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā, so yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati, evameva yogāvacarassa anurūpasenāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabba’’nti upadisati, tato tattha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttena yoginā kamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati.
已對照

而這位比丘被說為像豹一樣。就像大豹王在林野中依止草叢、密林或山叢而潛伏,捕取森林水牛、牛耳鹿、野豬等諸獸;同樣地,應知這位在林野等處勤修業處的比丘,也依次第取得須陀洹道、斯陀含道、阿那含道、阿羅漢道以及聖果。因此古師們說——

Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu dīpisadisoti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti, evameva ayaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiarahattamagge ceva ariyaphalañca gaṇhatīti veditabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –
緬 1.262已對照

「猶如名為豹者,潛伏而捕諸獸;

‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhatī mige;
已對照

這佛子亦如是,勤修瑜伽的觀者;

Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako;
已對照

進入林野之後,取得最上之果。」(《波羅夷義注》2.165;《長部義注》2.374;《中部義注》1.107)

Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107);
已對照

因此,世尊為顯示他勤勇奮進所宜之地——林野坐臥處,才說了「前往林野」等語。

Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
218已對照

二百一十八、此中,「前往林野(araññagato)」者:即在如是所說之相的諸林野——「出了因陀羅柱之外,這一切都是林野」(《分別論》529),以及「所謂林野的坐臥處,至少[相距]五百弓」(《波羅夷》654)——中,前往任何一處有遠離之樂的林野。「前往樹下(rukkhamūlagato)」者:即前往樹的近旁。「前往空閒處(suññāgāragato)」者:即前往空的、僻靜的處所。而此中,除了林野與樹下之外,前往其餘七種坐臥處者,也可以說是「前往空閒處」。

218. Tattha araññagatoti ‘‘araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) ca, ‘‘āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) ca evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesu araññesu yaṃkiñci pavivekasukhaṃ araññaṃ gato. Rukkhamūlagatoti rukkhasamīpaṃ gato. Suññāgāragatoti suññaṃ vivittokāsaṃ gato. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā araññañca rukkhamūlañca avasesasattavidhasenāsanagatopi suññāgāragatoti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
已對照

如是為他指示了隨順三季、隨順界與性行、適合入出息念之修習的坐臥處之後,[世尊]為指示不屬退縮、不屬掉舉一邊的寂靜威儀,而說「坐下(nisīdati)」。然後,為顯示他坐姿的穩固、入出息轉起的舒適,以及攝取所緣的方便,說了「結跏趺」等語。此中,「跏趺(pallaṅkaṃ)」者:即周匝以大腿相縛之坐。「結(ābhujitvā)」者:即縛。「保持其身正直(ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya)」者:即把上半身端正安置,使十八節脊椎骨端端相接。因為這樣坐著,皮、肉、筋腱便不彎曲下垂。於是,那些因它們彎曲下垂為緣而每一剎那會生起的諸受,便不生起。那些[受]不生起時,心便得專一,業處不致散失,得以增長、進展。「使念現起於面前(parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā)」者:即把念安置為朝向業處。或者,「圍(pari)」是攝取之義,「面(mukha)」是出離之義,「念(sati)」是現起之義,因此說「使念現起於面前」——此處之義也應依《無礙解道》(《無礙解道》1.164)中如是所說的方法而見。此中簡要[之義]是:「作成已攝取、已出離之念」。

Evamassa ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlañca ānāpānassatibhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upadisitvā alīnānuddhaccapakkhikaṃ santaṃ iriyāpathaṃ upadisanto nisīdatīti āha. Athassa nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ ārammaṇapariggahūpāyañca dassento pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvātiādimāha. Tattha pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimasarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā. Aṭṭhārasapiṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisīdantassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanappaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā na uppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. Atha vā parīti pariggahaṭṭho. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho. Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati ‘‘parimukhaṃ sati’’nti evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.164) vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo, pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvāti.
219緬 1.263已對照

二百一十九、「他只是具念地入息,具念地出息(so satova assasati sato passasati)」者:即那位比丘如是坐下、如是使念現起之後,不捨棄那念,正是具念地入息、具念地出息——是說他成為具念而行者(satokārī)。現在,為顯示他以哪些行相成為具念而行者,[世尊]說了「入息長時」等語。因為這已在《無礙解道》中,於「他只是具念地入息,具念地出息」這一[句]本身的分別裡說過——

「以三十二種行相成為具念而行者。依長入息而了知心一境性、不散亂者,念便現起;以那念、以那智,他成為具念而行者。依長出息……乃至……依隨觀舍離的入息。依隨觀舍離的出息而了知心一境性、不散亂者,念便現起;以那念、以那智,他成為具念而行者。」(《無礙解道》1.165)

此中,「入息長時(dīghaṃ vā assasanto)」者:即令長的入息轉起。「入息(assāso)」者:即向外出去的風;「出息(passāso)」者:即向內進入的風——這是在律義注中所說的。而在諸經義注中,則以相反的次序而出。此中,一切胎臥者從母胎出來時,首先是內裡的風向外出去;然後外面的風帶著微細的塵進入內裡,觸到上顎而熄滅。入出息首先應如是了知。

而它們的長與短,應依距離而知。猶如遍佈於空間之距離而住立的水或沙,被說為「長的水、長的沙」「短的水、短的沙」;同樣,即使是細碎分散的入出息,在象的身體與蛇的身體中,也是緩慢地充滿它們稱為自體的長距離,又緩慢地出去,所以被稱為「長」。它們迅速地充滿狗、兔等稱為自體的短距離,又迅速地出去,所以被稱為「短」。而在人當中,有些人如象、蛇等那樣,依時間的距離而長長地入息、出息;有些人如狗、兔等那樣短短地[入息、出息]。所以應知,對他們而言,依時間而在長距離中出去與進入的那些[入出息]是「長」,在短暫距離中出去與進入的是「短」。

此中,這位比丘以九種行相入息長、出息長時,了知「我入息長、出息長」;而應知,他如是了知時,以一種行相,身隨觀念處的修習便得成就。即如《無礙解道》(《無礙解道》1.166)中所說——

「如何入息長時了知『我入息長』,出息長時了知『我出息長』?他於稱為距離者中入長的入息;他於稱為距離者中出長的出息;他於稱為距離者中入、出長的入出息。於稱為距離者中入、出長的入出息時,欲便生起。由於欲,他於稱為距離者中入比那更微細的長的入息;由於欲,比那更微細的長的出息……乃至……於稱為距離者中入、出長的入出息。由於欲,於稱為距離者中入、出比那更微細的長的入出息時,愉悅便生起。由於愉悅,他於稱為距離者中入比那更微細的長的入息;由於愉悅,比那更微細的長的出息……乃至……於稱為距離者中入、出長的入出息。由於愉悅,於稱為距離者中入、出比那更微細的長的入出息時,心便從長的入出息轉離,舍便安住。以這九種行相,長的入出息是身;現起是念;隨觀是智。身是現起[處],不是念;念既是現起[處],也是念。以那念、以那智,他隨觀那身。因此稱為於身隨觀身的念處修習。」

於「短」一句也是這個方法。而這是差別:正如此處說「於稱為距離者中[入]長的入息」,在那[短句]裡出現的則是「於稱為短暫者中入短的入息」。所以應依「短」而配合,直到「因此稱為於身隨觀身的念處修習」為止。

如是,應知這[比丘]依距離與依短暫,以這些行相了知入出息,[便是]「入息長時,了知『我入息長』……乃至……出息短時,了知『我出息短』」。而他如是了知時——

入息有長短,

出息亦如是;

四種[行相]轉起,

或在比丘的鼻端。(《波羅夷義注》2.165)

219. So satova assasati sato passasatīti so bhikkhu evaṃ nisīditvā evañca satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā taṃ satiṃ avijahanto sato eva assasati sato passasati, satokārī hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni yehākārehi satokārī hoti, te dassetuṃ dīghaṃ vā assasantotiādimāha. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘so satova assasati sato passasatī’’ti etasseva vibhaṅge –
‘‘Bāttiṃsāya ākārehi sato kārī hoti. Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sato kārī hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena…pe… paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasena. Paṭinissaggānupassī passāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sato kārī hotī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.165).
Tattha dīghaṃ vā assasantoti dīghaṃ vā assāsaṃ pavattayanto. Assāsoti bahi nikkhamanavāto. Passāsoti anto pavisanavātoti vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Suttantaṭṭhakathāsu pana uppaṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ. Tattha sabbesampi gabbhaseyyakānaṃ mātukucchito nikkhamanakāle paṭhamaṃ abbhantaravāto bahi nikkhamati. Pacchā bāhiravāto sukhumarajaṃ gahetvā abbhantaraṃ pavisanto tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyati. Evaṃ tāva assāsapassāsā veditabbā.
Yā pana tesaṃ dīgharassatā, sā addhānavasena veditabbā. Yathā hi okāsaddhānaṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikā vā ‘‘dīghamudakaṃ dīghā vālikā, rassamudakaṃ rassā vālikā’’ti vuccati, evaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi assāsapassāsā hatthisarīre ca ahisarīre ca tesaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ dīghaṃ addhānaṃ saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti. Tasmā dīghāti vuccanti. Sunakhasasādīnaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ rassaṃ addhānaṃ sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamanti, tasmā rassāti vuccanti. Manussesu pana keci hatthiahiādayo viya kāladdhānavasena dīghaṃ assasanti ca passasanti ca. Keci sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ, tasmā tesaṃ kālavasena dīghamaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca te ‘‘dīghā’’ ittaramaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca ‘‘rassā’’ti veditabbā.
Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu navahākārehi dīghaṃ assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘dīghaṃ assasāmi, passasāmī’’ti pajānāti. Evaṃ pajānato cassa ekenākārena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatīti veditabbā. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.166) –
‘‘Kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ passasanto dīghaṃ passasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Dīghaṃ passāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte passasati. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi chando uppajjati. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ…pe… dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi pāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ…pe… dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā cittaṃ vivattati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Imehi navahi ākārehi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyo. Upaṭṭhānaṃ sati. Anupassanā ñāṇaṃ. Kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti.
Esa nayo rassapadepi. Ayaṃ pana viseso, yathā ettha ‘‘dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidha ‘‘rassaṃ assāsaṃ ittarasaṅkhāte assasatī’’ti āgataṃ. Tasmā rassavasena yāva ‘‘tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti, tāva yojetabbaṃ.
Evaṃ ayaṃ addhānavasena ittaravasena ca imehākārehi assāsapassāse pajānanto dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti…pe… rassaṃ vā passasanto rassaṃ passasāmīti pajānātīti veditabbo. Evaṃ pajānato cassa –
Dīgho rasso ca assāso,
Passāsopi ca tādiso;
Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti,
Nāsikaggeva bhikkhunoti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
220已對照

二百二十、「他學『我將覺知全身而入息……乃至……出息』(sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati)」者:即「我將使整個入息身的初、中、後都被知曉、使之明顯而入息」,他這樣學;「我將使整個出息身的初、中、後都被知曉、使之明顯而出息」,他這樣學。如是使之被知曉、使之明顯,以與智相應的心入息、出息;所以說「他學『我將入息、出息』」。因為對某一比丘而言,在細碎分散而散佈的入息身或出息身中,開頭是明顯的,中間與末後則不[明顯];他只能攝取開頭,在中間與末後便疲倦。對某一[比丘]而言,中間是明顯的,開頭與末後則不[明顯]。對某一[比丘]而言,末後是明顯的,開頭與中間則不[明顯];他只能攝取末後,在開頭與中間便疲倦。對某一[比丘]而言,一切都是明顯的;他能攝取一切,在任何地方都不疲倦。[世尊]為顯示「應當成為這樣的人」,而說:「他學『我將覺知全身而入息……乃至……出息』。」

220. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti sakalassa assāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmīti sikkhati. Sakalassa passāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ñāṇasampayuttacittena assasati ceva passasati ca. Tasmā ‘‘assasissāmi passasissāmī’’ti sikkhatīti vuccati. Ekassa hi bhikkhuno cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭe assāsakāye passāsakāye vā ādi pākaṭo hoti, na majjhapariyosānaṃ. So ādimeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, majjhapariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa majjhaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādipariyosānaṃ. Ekassa pariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādimajjhaṃ. So pariyosānaṃyeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādimajjhe kilamati. Ekassa sabbampi pākaṭaṃ hoti, so sabbampi pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, na katthaci kilamati, tādisena bhavitabbanti dassento āha – ‘‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmīti…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti.
緬 1.266已對照

此中,「他學(sikkhati)」者:即他如是努力、精勤。或者,這樣的人的律儀,這是此中的增上戒學;這樣的人的定,這是增上心學;這樣的人的慧,這是增上慧學——他於那所緣上,以那念、以那作意,學、習行、修習、多作這三學,此中之義應如是見。

Tattha sikkhatīti evaṃ ghaṭati vāyamati. Yo vā tathābhūtassa saṃvaro, ayamettha adhisīlasikkhā. Yo tathābhūtassa samādhi, ayaṃ adhicittasikkhā. Yā tathābhūtassa paññā, ayaṃ adhipaññāsikkhāti imā tisso sikkhāyo tasmiṃ ārammaṇe tāya satiyā tena manasikārena sikkhati āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
已對照

此中,由於在前一種方式中,只應入息、出息,不應作其他任何事;而從此以後,則應當致力於令智生起等。所以,在那裡以現在時說聖典「了知『我入息』,了知『我出息』」;而為顯示從此以後所應作的令智生起等行相,以「他學『我將覺知全身而入息』」等方式,以未來時的言詞安立聖典——應如是知。

Tattha yasmā purimanaye kevalaṃ assasitabbaṃ passasitabbameva, na ca aññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya pana ñāṇuppādanādīsu yogo karaṇīyo. Tasmā tattha assasāmīti pajānāti passasāmīti pajānāticceva vattamānakālavasena pāḷiṃ vatvā ito paṭṭhāya kattabbassa ñāṇuppādanādino ākārassa dassanatthaṃ sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmītiādinā nayena anāgatavacanavasena pāḷi āropitāti veditabbā.
已對照

「他學『我將令身行止息而入息……乃至……出息』(passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati)」者:即「我將一邊令粗的身行止息、安息、滅、平息,一邊入息、出息」,他這樣學。此中,粗、微細與止息(passaddhi)應如是知。因為這位比丘在先前未攝取的時候,身與心都有焦慮、是粗的。身心的粗性未平息時,入出息也是粗的,更強地轉起,鼻子不夠用,他也以口入息、出息而住。而當他的身與心都被攝取時,那時它們便寂靜、平息;它們平息時,入出息便微細地轉起,達到須要探察「到底有還是沒有」的行相。

Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento paṭippassambhento nirodhento vūpasamento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tatra evaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā. Imassa hi bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca cittañca sadarathā honti oḷārikā. Kāyacittānaṃ oḷārikatte avūpasante assāsapassāsāpi oḷārikā honti, balavatarā hutvā pavattanti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panassa kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā honti, tadā te santā honti vūpasantā. Tesu vūpasantesu assāsapassāsā sukhumā hutvā pavattanti, ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbatākārappattā honti.
緬 1.267已對照

譬如一個人奔跑之後,或從山上下來之後,或從頭上放下重擔之後站著時,入出息是粗的,鼻子不夠用,他也以口入息、出息而住;而當他消除了那疲勞,沐浴、飲水,把溼布放在胸口,躺在清涼的樹蔭下時,他的那些入出息便變得微細,達到須要探察「到底有還是沒有」的行相;同樣,這位比丘在先前未攝取的時候,身與……乃至……達到須要探察的行相。這是什麼緣故呢?因為他在先前未攝取的時候,沒有「我令一個個粗的身行止息」這樣的關注、注意、作意、省察,而在攝取的時候則有。所以,他的身行在攝取之時比未攝取之時微細。因此古師們說——

Seyyathāpi purisassa dhāvitvā, pabbatā vā orohitvā, mahābhāraṃ vā sīsato oropetvā ṭhitassa oḷārikā assāsapassāsā honti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panesa taṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca allasāṭakaṃ hadaye katvā sītāya chāyāya nipanno hoti, athassa te assāsapassāsā sukhumā honti ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbatākārappattā, evameva imassa bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca…pe… vicetabbatākārappattā honti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tathā hissa pubbe apariggahitakāle ‘‘oḷārikoḷārike kāyasaṅkhāre passambhemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahitakāle pana atthi. Tenassa apariggahitakālato pariggahitakāle kāyasaṅkhāro sukhumo hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
已對照

「身與心躁動時,[身行]便過強地轉起;

‘‘Sāraddhe kāye citte ca, adhimattaṃ pavattati;
已對照

身不躁動之時,便微細地轉起。」(《波羅夷義注》2.165)

Asāraddhamhi kāyamhi, sukhumaṃ sampavattatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
221緬 1.268已對照

二百二十一、[身行]於攝取時也是粗的,於初禪近行時是微細的;於那[初禪近行]時也是粗的,於初禪時是微細的;於初禪與第二禪近行時是粗的,於第二禪時是微細的;於第二禪與第三禪近行時是粗的,於第三禪時是微細的;於第三禪與第四禪近行時是粗的,於第四禪時極微細,甚至達到不轉起。這暫且是長部誦者與相應部誦者的見解。

而中部誦者們則主張:[身行]於初禪時是粗的,於第二禪近行時是微細的——如是,比起一一較下的禪,於一一較上的禪的近行時也更微細。然而依一切[諸師]的見解,在未攝取時轉起的身行,於攝取時安息;在攝取時轉起的身行,於初禪近行時……乃至……在第四禪近行時轉起的身行,於第四禪時安息。這暫且是止中的方法。

而在觀中,未攝取時轉起的身行是粗的,於攝取大種時是微細的;那也是粗的,於攝取所造色時是微細的;那也是粗的,於攝取一切色時是微細的;那也是粗的,於攝取非色時是微細的;那也是粗的,於攝取色與非色時是微細的;那也是粗的,於攝取緣時是微細的;那也是粗的,於攝取有緣的名色時是微細的;那也是粗的,於以相為所緣的觀時是微細的;那於弱觀時是粗的,於強觀時是微細的。此中,應依前面所說的方法,知前前[身行]由後後[身行]而安息。如是,此中應知粗、微細與止息。

而在《無礙解道》(《無礙解道》1.171)中,連同詰責與澄清,它的義是這樣說的——

「如何『我將令身行止息而入息……乃至……出息』,他這樣學?什麼是身行?長的入出息是身的,這些法系屬於身,是身行。他一邊令那些身行止息、滅、平息,一邊學……乃至……凡由於那樣的身行而有身的前屈、側屈、遍屈、後屈、動搖、顫動、晃動、震動,[對此]他學『我將令身行止息而入息』,他學『我將令身行止息而出息』。凡由於那樣的身行而身無前屈、無側屈、無遍屈、無後屈,不動搖、不顫動、不晃動、不震動,[對此]他學『我將令身行止息為寂靜、微細的而入息、出息』。

「若是這樣:他學『我將令身行止息而入息』,他學『我將令身行止息而出息』——既然如此,便沒有風之覺知的產生,也沒有入出息的產生,也沒有入出息唸的產生,也沒有入出息念定的產生,智者們也不入那等至,也不從[它]出起。

「若是這樣:他學『我將令身行止息而入息、出息』——既然如此,便有風之覺知的產生,有入出息的產生,有入出息唸的產生,有入出息念定的產生,智者們也入那等至,也從[它]出起。猶如什麼呢?

「猶如敲擊銅器時,起先粗的聲音轉起;由於粗的聲音之相已善取、已善作意、已善確知,即使粗的聲音已滅,其後微細的聲音轉起;由於微細的聲音之相已善取、已善作意、已善確知,即使微細的聲音已滅,其後心也以微細的聲音之相為所緣而轉起。同樣,起先粗的入出息轉起;由於粗的入出息之相已善取、已善作意、已善確知,即使粗的入出息已滅,其後微細的入出息轉起;由於微細的入出息之相已善取、已善作意、已善確知,即使微細的入出息已滅,其後心也以微細的入出息之相為所緣,不趨於散亂。

「既然如此,便有風之覺知的產生,有入出息的產生,有入出息唸的產生,有入出息念定的產生,智者們也入那等至,也從[它]出起。『令身行止息』的入出息是身;現起是念;隨觀是智。身是現起[處],不是念;念既是現起[處],也是念。以那念、以那智,他隨觀那身。因此稱為於身隨觀身的念處修習。」

這暫且是此中依身隨觀而說的第一四法組的逐句釋義。

221. Pariggahepi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhānupacāre sukhumo. Tasmimpi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhāne sukhumo. Paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, dutiyajjhāne sukhumo. Dutiyajjhāne ca tatiyajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, tatiyajjhāne sukhumo. Tatiyajjhāne ca catutthajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, catutthajjhāne atisukhumo appavattimeva pāpuṇātīti. Idaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakasaṃyuttabhāṇakānaṃ mataṃ.
Majjhimabhāṇakā pana paṭhamajjhāne oḷāriko, dutiyajjhānupacāre sukhumoti evaṃ heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijjhānupacārepi sukhumataramicchanti. Sabbesaññeva pana matena apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhati. Pariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhānupacāre…pe… catutthajjhānupacāre pavattakāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne paṭippassambhati. Ayaṃ tāva samathe nayo.
Vipassanāyaṃ pana apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro oḷāriko, mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, upādārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, arūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, paccayapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sappaccayanāmarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya sukhumo. Sopi dubbalavipassanāya oḷāriko, balavavipassanāya sukhumo. Tattha pubbe vuttanayeneva purimassa purimassa pacchimena pacchimena paṭippassaddhi veditabbā. Evamettha oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā.
Paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.171) panassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi evamattho vutto –
‘‘Kathaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati? Katame kāyasaṅkhārā? Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyikā ete dhammā kāyapaṭibaddhā kāyasaṅkhārā. Te kāyasaṅkhāre passambhento nirodhento vūpasamento sikkhati…pe… yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa ānamanā, vinamanā, sannamanā, paṇamanā, iñjanā, phandanā, calanā, kampanā passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa na ānamanā, na vinamanā, na sannamanā, na paṇamanā, aniñjanā, aphandanā, acalanā, akampanā santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati.
‘‘Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti. Assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā na hoti. Ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā na hoti, na ca naṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
‘‘Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi. Yathā kathaṃ viya?
‘‘Seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā saddā pavattanti. Oḷārikānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ sugahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumakā saddā pavattanti. Sukhumakānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ pavattati, evameva paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā assāsapassāsā pavattanti. Oḷārikānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumakā assāsapassāsā pavattanti. Sukhumakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumaassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati.
‘‘Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assāsapassāsā kāyo, upaṭṭhānaṃ sati, anupassanā ñāṇaṃ, kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati, sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca, tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti.
Ayaṃ tāvettha kāyānupassanāvasena vuttassa paṭhamacatukkassa anupubbapadavaṇṇanā.
222–223緬 1.270已對照

二百二十二、而由於此中唯這一個四法組是就初學者的業處而說的,其餘三個四法組則是就此中已得禪者依受隨觀、心隨觀、法隨觀而說的;所以,想要修習這業處,以入出息第四禪為近因的觀,連同諸無礙解證得阿羅漢[果]的初學的良家子,應依前面所說的方法作完淨化戒等一切應作之事,然後在前面所說那樣的阿闍梨跟前學取具五節的業處。

此中,這五節是:學取、遍問、現起、安止、相。此中,名為學取,即對業處的學取;名為遍問,即對業處的遍問;名為現起,即業處的現起;名為安止,即業處的安止;名為相,即業處的相——是說對業處之自性的確知:「這業處有如此之相」。

如是學取具五節的業處的人,自己不疲倦,也不煩擾阿闍梨。所以,應令[阿闍梨]少少地講授,長時誦習,如是學取具五節的業處之後,住在阿闍梨跟前或別處前面所說那樣的坐臥處中,斷除小障礙,作完飯食之事,除去食後困頓,安適地坐下,以憶念三寶的功德而令心喜,對從阿闍梨處所學取的連一句也不迷亂,[如是]作意這入出息念業處。此中,這是作意的方法——

222. Yasmā panettha idameva catukkaṃ ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ. Itarāni pana tīṇi catukkāni ettha pattajjhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena vuttāni. Tasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānapadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena pubbe vuttanayeneva sīlaparisodhanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā vuttappakārassa ācariyassa santike pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetabbaṃ.
Tatrime pañca sandhayo uggaho, paripucchā, upaṭṭhānaṃ, appanā, lakkhaṇanti. Tattha uggaho nāma kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ. Paripucchā nāma kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā. Upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānaṃ. Appanā nāma kammaṭṭhānassa appanā. Lakkhaṇaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃlakkhaṇamidaṃ kammaṭṭhāna’’nti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvūpadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
Evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhanto attanāpi na kilamati, ācariyampi na viheseti. Tasmā thokaṃ uddisāpetvā bahukālaṃ sajjhāyitvā evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā ācariyassa santike vā aññatra vā pubbe vuttappakāre senāsane vasantena upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhena katabhattakiccena bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvā sukhanisinnena ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā ācariyuggahato ekapadampi asammuyhantena idaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ manasikāravidhi –
223.
已對照

二百二十三、

「計數、隨逐、觸、安置、觀察,

Gaṇanā anubandhanā, phusanā ṭhapanā sallakkhaṇā;
已對照

還轉、遍淨,以及它們的回觀。」

Vivaṭṭanā pārisuddhi, tesañca paṭipassanāti.
已對照

此中,「計數(gaṇanā)」者:即唯是計數。「隨逐(anubandhanā)」者:即隨運。「觸(phusanā)」者:即所觸之處。「安置(ṭhapanā)」者:即安止。「觀察(sallakkhaṇā)」者:即觀。「還轉(vivaṭṭanā)」者:即道。「遍淨(pārisuddhi)」者:即果。「以及它們的回觀(tesañca paṭipassanā)」者:即省察。

Tattha gaṇanāti gaṇanāyeva. Anubandhanāti anuvahanā. Phusanāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. Ṭhapanāti appanā. Sallakkhaṇāti vipassanā. Vivaṭṭanāti maggo. Pārisuddhīti phalaṃ. Tesañca paṭipassanāti paccavekkhaṇā.
已對照

此中,這初學的良家子應先以計數作意這業處。而計數者不應在五以下停止,不應帶到十以上,中間不應顯出斷缺。因為在五以下停止者,心之生起在狹窄的範圍中掙扎,猶如被關在狹窄牛欄裡的牛群;帶到十以上者,心之生起便依附於計數;中間顯出斷缺者,心便動搖:「我的業處是否已達頂點了呢?」因此,應避開這些過失而計數。

Tattha iminā ādikammikena kulaputtena paṭhamaṃ gaṇanāya idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ. Gaṇentena ca pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā na ṭhapetabbaṃ. Dasannaṃ upari na netabbaṃ. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ na dassetabbaṃ. Pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā ṭhapentassa hi sambādhe okāse cittuppādo vipphandati sambādhe vaje sanniruddhagogaṇo viya. Dasannampi upari nentassa gaṇananissitako cittuppādo hoti. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ dassentassa ‘‘sikhāppattaṃ nu kho me kammaṭṭhānaṃ, no’’ti cittaṃ vikampati. Tasmā ete dose vajjetvā gaṇetabbaṃ.
緬 1.271已對照

而計數者應先以慢數、[即]量谷者的計數來計數。因為量谷者把量筒裝滿後,說「一」便倒出;再裝時,見到一些雜物,一邊把它扔掉,一邊說「一、一」。於「二、二」等也是這個方式。同樣,這[修行者]也應取入出息中現起的那一個,從「一、一」開始,直到「十、十」,一一察知正在轉起的[入出息]而計數。他這樣計數時,出去與進來的入出息便變得明顯。

Gaṇentena ca paṭhamaṃ dandhagaṇanāya dhaññamāpakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Dhaññamāpako hi nāḷiṃ pūretvā ‘‘eka’’nti vatvā okirati. Puna pūrento kiñci kacavaraṃ disvā taṃ chaḍḍento ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti vadati. Esa nayo dve dvetiādīsu. Evameva imināpi assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti, taṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti ādiṃ katvā yāva ‘‘dasa dasā’’ti pavattamānaṃ pavattamānaṃ upalakkhetvāva gaṇetabbaṃ. Tassa evaṃ gaṇayato nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca assāsapassāsā pākaṭā honti.
已對照

然後他應捨棄那慢數、[即]量谷者的計數,而以快數、[即]牧牛者的計數來計數。因為熟練的牧牛者把小石子等兜在衣襟裡,手持繩與杖,一早前往牛欄,拍打母牛的背,坐在門閂柱的頂上,對一一到達門口的母牛,擲出小石子而數「一、二」。在狹窄處辛苦地過了三更之夜的牛群,一邊出來,一邊彼此摩擦,一陣陣急速地成群成群出來;他便一陣陣急速地數「三、四、五、十」。同樣,這[修行者]依前述的方式計數時,入出息變得明顯,快快地一再來回。於是他知道「[它們]一再來回」,不在內也不在外取,只取一一到達門口的,快快地計數:「一、二、三、四、五、六;一、二、三、四、五、六、七……乃至……八、九、十。」因為在與計數相系的業處中,心正是以計數之力而成為一境的,猶如在急流中依篙的支撐而穩住船。

Athānena taṃ dandhagaṇanaṃ dhaññamāpakagaṇanaṃ pahāya sīghagaṇanāya gopālakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Cheko hi gopālako sakkharādayo ucchaṅgena gahetvā rajjudaṇḍahattho pātova vajaṃ gantvā gāvo piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā palighatthambhamatthake nisinno dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gāviṃ ekā dveti sakkharaṃ khipitvā gaṇeti. Tiyāmarattiṃ sambādhe okāse dukkhaṃ vutthagogaṇo nikkhamanto nikkhamanto aññamaññaṃ upanighaṃsanto vegena vegena puñjapuñjo hutvā nikkhamati. So vegena vegena ‘‘tīṇi cattāri pañca dasā’’ti gaṇetiyeva, evamimassāpi purimanayena gaṇayato assāsapassāsā pākaṭā hutvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ punappunaṃ sañcaranti. Tatonena ‘‘punappunaṃ sañcarantī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca agahetvā dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gahetvā ‘‘eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha. Eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha satta…pe… aṭṭha, nava, dasā’’ti sīghaṃ sīyaṃ gaṇetabbameva. Gaṇanapaṭibaddhe hi kammaṭṭhāne gaṇanabaleneva cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, arittupatthambhanavasena caṇḍasote nāvāṭṭhapanamiva.
已對照

他這樣快快地計數時,業處便像不斷地轉起一般而現起。於是他知道「[它]不斷地轉起」,不在內也不在外把握風,仍依前述的方式一陣陣急速地計數。因為隨著進入裡面的風而把心帶進去者,裡面就好像被風衝擊、被脂肪充滿一般;隨著出到外面的風而把心帶出去者,心便散亂於外面種種的所緣。而唯有把念安置在一一所觸之處而修習者,修習才得成就。因此說:「不在內也不在外把握風,仍依前述的方式一陣陣急速地計數。」

Tassevaṃ sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇayato kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirantaraṃ pavattaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Atha nirantaraṃ pavattatīti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabbaṃ. Anto pavisanavātena hi saddhiṃ cittaṃ pavesayato abbhantaraṃ vātabbhāhataṃ medapūritaṃ viya hoti. Bahi nikkhamanavātena saddhiṃ cittaṃ nīharato bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipati. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhokāse pana satiṃ ṭhapetvā bhāventasseva bhāvanā sampajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabba’’nti.
已對照

然而這應計數多久呢?直到不用計數,念也安住於入出息所緣為止。因為計數正是為了截斷向外散逸的尋,而令念安住於入出息所緣。

Kīvaciraṃ panetaṃ gaṇetabbanti? Yāva vinā gaṇanāya assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati santiṭṭhati. Bahivisaṭavitakkavicchedaṃ katvā assāsapassāsārammaṇe satisaṇṭhāpanatthaṃyeva hi gaṇanāti.
224緬 1.272已對照

二百二十四、如是以計數作意之後,應以隨逐作意。所謂隨逐,即止息計數,以念不斷地隨行入出息。而那並不是依隨行初、中、後的方式。因為向外出去的風,以臍為初,以心臟為中,以鼻端為後;向內進入的風,以鼻端為初,以心臟為中,以臍為後。而隨行那[初、中、後]者,散亂的心便導致躁動與動搖。即如所說——

224. Evaṃ gaṇanāya manasi katvā anubandhanāya manasi kātabbaṃ. Anubandhanā nāma gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā satiyā nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanaṃ. Tañca kho na ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena. Bahinikkhamanavātassa hi nābhi ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Abbhantaraṃ pavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ nābhi pariyosānaṃ. Tañcassa anugacchato vikkhepagataṃ cittaṃ sāraddhāya ceva hoti iñjanāya ca. Yathāha –
已對照

「以念隨行入息的初、中、後者,由於以向內散亂的心,身與心都躁動、動搖、顫動;以念隨行出息的初、中、後者,由於以向外散亂的心,身與心都躁動、動搖、顫動。」(《無礙解道》1.157)

‘‘Assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā ca. Passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157).
已對照

因此,以隨逐作意者,不應依初、中、後而作意,而應依觸與安置而作意。因為不像依計數與隨逐那樣,另有依觸與安置的作意。而就在一一所觸之處計數者,是以計數與觸作意;就在那裡止息計數,以念隨逐那些[入出息],並依安止而安置心者,稱為以隨逐、觸與安置作意。這義應依諸義注中所說的跛子喻與守門人喻,以及《無礙解道》中所說的鋸喻而知。

Tasmā anubandhanāya manasikarontena ādimajjhapariyosānavasena na manasi kātabbaṃ. Apica kho phusanāvasena ca ṭhapanāvasena ca manasi kātabbaṃ. Gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva pana gaṇento gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karoti. Tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto, appanāvasena ca cittaṃ ṭhapento anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotīti vuccati. Svāyamattho aṭṭhakathāsu vuttapaṅguḷadovārikūpamāhi paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttakakacūpamāya ca veditabbo.
225已對照

二百二十五、此中,這是跛子喻——猶如跛子為在鞦韆上嬉戲的母子推動鞦韆之後,就坐在鞦韆柱的腳下,看見依次來、去的鞦韆板的兩端與中間,卻不為看兩端與中間而忙碌;同樣,這位比丘依念站在繫縛柱的腳下,推動入出息的鞦韆,就在那相上以念坐著,以念隨行依次來、去的入出息在所觸之處的初、中、後,並把心安置在那裡而看見,卻不為看它們而忙碌——這是跛子喻。

225. Tatrāyaṃ paṅguḷopamā – seyyathāpi paṅguḷo dolāya kīḷataṃ mātāputtānaṃ dolaṃ khipitvā tattheva dolāthambhamūle nisinno kamena āgacchantassa ca gacchantassa ca dolāphalakassa ubho koṭiyo majjhañca passati, na ca ubhokoṭimajjhānaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti, evamevāyaṃ bhikkhu sativasena upanibandhanathambhamūle ṭhatvā assāsapassāsadolaṃ khipitvā tattheva nimitte satiyā nisīdanto kamena āgacchantānañca gacchantānañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhāne assāsapassāsānaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchanto tattha ca cittaṃ ṭhapento passati, na ca tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti, ayaṃ paṅguḷopamā.
226緬 1.273已對照

二百二十六、而這是守門人喻——猶如守門人不審查城內與城外的人:「你是誰?從哪裡來?要去哪裡?你手中是什麼?」因為他們不是他的責任;他只審查一一到達門口的。同樣,進入裡面的風與出到外面的風都不是這位比丘的責任,只有一一到達門口的才是[他的]責任——這是守門人喻。

226. Ayaṃ pana dovārikūpamā – seyyathāpi dovāriko nagarassa anto ca bahi ca purise ‘‘ko tvaṃ, kuto vā āgato, kuhiṃ vā gacchasi, kiṃ vā te hatthe’’ti na vīmaṃsati. Na hi tassa te bhārā, dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva pana vīmaṃsati, evameva imassa bhikkhuno antopaviṭṭhavātā ca bahinikkhantavātā ca na bhārā honti, dvārappattā dvārappattāyeva bhārāti ayaṃ dovārikūpamā.
227已對照

二百二十七、而鋸喻應從開頭如是了知。因為這已被說過——

227. Kakacūpamā pana ādito paṭṭhāya evaṃ veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
已對照

「相、入息、出息,不是一心的所緣;

‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa;
已對照

而不知這三法者,修習不可得。

Ajānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā nupalabbhati.
已對照

「相、入息、出息,不是一心的所緣;

‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa;
已對照

而知這三法者,修習便可得。」(《無礙解道》1.159)

Jānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.159);
已對照

「這三法如何不是一心的所緣,而這三法又並非不被知,心也不趣向散亂,勤得以顯現,[他]成就加行,證得殊勝呢?猶如一棵樹放在平坦的地面上,有人用鋸鋸它。那人的念依接觸樹的鋸齒而現起,他不作意來或去的鋸齒,然而來或去的鋸齒並非不被知,勤得以顯現,[他]成就加行,證得殊勝。

‘‘Kathaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhi gacchati? Seyyathāpi rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto, tamenaṃ puriso kakacena chindeyya. Rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
緬 1.274已對照

「如樹放在平坦的地面上,繫縛相也是如此;如鋸齒,入出息也是如此;如那人的念依接觸樹的鋸齒而現起,他不作意來或去的鋸齒,然而來或去的鋸齒並非不被知,勤得以顯現,[他]成就加行,證得殊勝;同樣,比丘令念現起於鼻端或口相(mukhanimitta)而坐,他不作意來或去的入出息,然而來或去的入出息並非不被知,勤得以顯現,[他]成就加行,證得殊勝。

‘‘Yathā rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto, evaṃ upanibandhanānimittaṃ. Yathā kakacadantā, evaṃ assāsapassāsā. Yathā rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati, evameva bhikkhu nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā nisinno hoti, na āgate vā gate vā assāsapassāse manasi karoti, na ca āgatā vā gatā vā assāsapassāsā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
已對照

「『勤』者:什麼是勤?發起精進者的身與心都適業——這是勤。什麼是加行?發起精進者的諸隨煩惱被舍斷,諸尋平息——這是加行。什麼是殊勝?發起精進者的諸結被舍斷,諸隨眠終盡——這是殊勝。如是,這三法不是一心的所緣,而這三法又並非不被知,心也不趣向散亂,勤得以顯現,[他]成就加行,證得殊勝(《無礙解道》1.159)。

‘‘Padhānanti katamaṃ padhānaṃ? Āraddhavīriyassa kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ hoti, idaṃ padhānaṃ. Katamo payogo? Āraddhavīriyassa upakkilesā pahīyanti, vitakkā vūpasamanti, ayaṃ payogo. Katamo viseso? Āraddhavīriyassa saṃyojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantī honti, ayaṃ viseso. Evaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati (paṭi. ma. 1.159).
已對照

「誰的入出息念圓滿、善修習,

‘‘Ānāpānassati yassa, paripuṇṇā subhāvitā;
已對照

依次積習,如佛陀所教示;

Anupubbaṃ paricitā, yathā buddhena desitā;
已對照

他照耀這世間,猶如脫離雲層的月亮。」(《無礙解道》1.160)

So imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti, abbhā muttova candimā’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.160);
已對照

這是鋸喻。而此處,應知它的用處唯在於不依來去而作意。

Ayaṃ kakacūpamā. Idha panassa āgatāgatavasena amanasikāramattameva payojananti veditabbaṃ.
228已對照

二百二十八、作意這業處時,有些人不久便生起相,併成就以其餘禪支所莊嚴的、稱為安止的安置。而有些人,從唯以計數作意之時起,依粗的入出息次第滅,身的躁擾平息時,身與心都變得輕快,身體好像達到了躍向空中的樣子。猶如身躁動者坐在床上或椅上時,床椅下陷、嘎吱作響,鋪蓋起皺;而身不躁動者坐下時,床椅既不下陷,也不作響,鋪蓋也不起皺,床椅就像塞滿了木棉絮一般。為什麼呢?因為不躁動的身是輕的。同樣,從以計數作意之時起,依粗的入出息次第滅,身的躁擾平息時,身與心都變得輕快,身體好像達到了躍向空中的樣子。

228. Idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaroto kassaci na cireneva nimittañca uppajjati, avasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjati. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālato pabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti. Yathā sāraddhakāyassa mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdato mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, vikūjati, paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti. Asāraddhakāyassa pana nisīdato neva mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, na vikūjati, na paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti, tūlapicupūritaṃ viya mañcapīṭhaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā asāraddho kāyo lahuko hoti. Evameva gaṇanāvasena manasikārakālato pabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti.
緬 1.275已對照

當他粗的入出息滅時,以細的入出息之相為所緣的心轉起;那也滅時,[心]仍一再以比那更細、更細的相為所緣而轉起。怎樣呢?猶如有人以大鐵棒敲擊銅盤,一擊便生起大聲,他以粗聲為所緣的心轉起;粗聲滅時,此後[心]以細聲之相為所緣;那也滅時,[心]仍一再以比那更細、更細的聲之相為所緣而轉起——應知如是。這也已被說過——「猶如敲擊銅器時」(《無礙解道》1.171),詳說[見彼處]。

Tassa oḷārike assāsapassāse niruddhe sukhumassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavattati. Tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumataraṃ sukhumataraṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ pavattatiyeva. Kathaṃ? Yathā puriso mahatiyā lohasalākāya kaṃsathālaṃ ākoṭeyya, ekappahārena mahāsaddo uppajjeyya, tassa oḷārikasaddārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavatteyya. Niruddhe oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇaṃ, tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumataraṃ sukhumataraṃ saddanimittārammaṇaṃ pavattateva, evanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampicetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.171) vitthāro.
229已對照

二百二十九、因為其他業處越往上越顯著,這[業處]卻不是這樣;而這[業處],越往上修習,就越趨於細微,甚至不再現起。而當它這樣不現起時,那比丘不應從座位起來,抖抖皮片就走。那麼應當做什麼呢?不應想著「我去問阿闍梨」,或「現在我的業處丟了」而起來。因為打亂威儀而走的人,業處總是新而又新的。因此,應就照原來坐著,從[原來的]處所把它取回來。

229. Yathā hi aññāni kammaṭṭhānāni uparūpari vibhūtāni honti, na tathā idaṃ. Idaṃ pana uparūpari bhāventassa sukhumattaṃ gacchati, upaṭṭhānampi na upagacchati, evaṃ anupaṭṭhahante pana tasmiṃ tena bhikkhunā uṭṭhāyāsanā cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā na gantabbaṃ. Kiṃ kātabbaṃ? ‘‘Ācariyaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘naṭṭhaṃ dāni me kammaṭṭhāna’’nti vā na vuṭṭhātabbaṃ. Iriyāpathaṃ vikopetvā gacchato hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ navanavameva hoti. Tasmā yathānisinneneva desato āharitabbaṃ.
已對照

此中,這是取回的方法:那比丘知道業處不現起之後,應這樣思量:「這所謂的入出息在哪裡有,在哪裡沒有?在誰有,在誰沒有?」這樣思量時,知道「這些在母胎中沒有,沉沒水中者沒有,同樣,成為無想者、死者、入第四禪者、具足色有與無色有者、入滅盡定者都沒有」之後,應這樣自己督責自己:「賢者,你既不在母胎中,也沒有沉沒水中,沒有成為無想者,沒有死,沒有入第四禪,沒有具足色有與無色有,也沒有入滅盡定。你的入出息確實是有的,只是由於慧鈍而不能把握。」於是他應依平常所觸[之處]安置心而轉起作意。因為這些[入出息]對長鼻者觸擊鼻孔而轉起,對短鼻者[觸擊]上唇。因此,他應以「[它們]觸擊這個處所」而安置相。正是緣於這一理由,世尊說:「諸比丘,我不說失念、不正知者有入出息唸的修習。」(《中部》3.149;《相應部》5.992)

Tatrāyaṃ āharaṇūpāyo, tena hi bhikkhunā kammaṭṭhānassa anupaṭṭhānabhāvaṃ ñatvā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ, ime assāsapassāsā nāma kattha atthi, kattha natthi. Kassa vā atthi, kassa vā natthīti. Athevaṃ paṭisañcikkhatā ime antomātukucchiyaṃ natthi, udake nimuggānaṃ natthi, tathā asaññībhūtānaṃ, matānaṃ, catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ, rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ, nirodhasamāpannānanti ñatvā evaṃ attanāva attā paṭicodetabbo ‘‘nanu tvaṃ, paṇḍita, neva mātukucchigato, na udake nimuggo, na asaññībhūto, na mato, na catutthajjhānasamāpanno, na rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgī, na nirodhasamāpanno. Atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā, mandapaññatāya pana pariggahetuṃ na sakkosī’’ti. Athānena pakatiphuṭṭhavasena cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ime hi dīghanāsikassa nāsāpuṭaṃ ghaṭṭentā pavattanti. Rassanāsikassa uttaroṭṭhaṃ. Tasmānena imaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ ghaṭṭentīti nimittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Imameva hi atthavasaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, muṭṭhasatissa asampajānassa ānāpānassatibhāvanaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.149; saṃ. ni. 5.992).
230緬 1.276已對照

二百三十、因為雖然任何業處都唯有具念、正知者才得成就,然而作意除此以外的[業處]者,[那業處]會[越來越]明顯。而這入出息念業處是重大的,修習也是重大的,是諸佛、獨覺佛、佛子這些大士的作意之地;既不是微小的,也不是微小的眾生所親近的。越是作意它,它就越寂靜、越細微。因此,於此需要強有力的念與慧。

230. Kiñcāpi hi yaṃkiñci kammaṭṭhānaṃ satassa sampajānasseva sampajjati. Ito aññaṃ pana manasikarontassa pākaṭaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pana ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ garukaṃ garukabhāvanaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhaputtānaṃ mahāpurisānaṃyeva manasikārabhūmibhūtaṃ, na ceva ittaraṃ, na ca ittarasattasamāsevitaṃ. Yathā yathā manasi karīyati, tathā tathā santañceva hoti sukhumañca. Tasmā ettha balavatī sati ca paññā ca icchitabbā.
已對照

猶如縫補細布衣時,針也需要細,穿針孔的鑽比那更細;同樣,在修習這猶如細布的業處時,猶如針的念,以及猶如穿針孔之鑽的、與它相應的慧,都需要強有力。而具足那念與慧的比丘,不應在平常所觸之處以外尋找那些入出息。

Yathā hi maṭṭhasāṭakassa tunnakaraṇakāle sūcipi sukhumā icchitabbā. Sūcipāsavedhanampi tato sukhumataraṃ, evameva maṭṭhasāṭakasadisassa imassa kammaṭṭhānassa bhāvanākāle sūcipaṭibhāgā satipi, sūcipāsavedhanapaṭibhāgā taṃsampayuttā paññāpi balavatī icchitabbā. Tāhi ca pana satipaññāhi samannāgatena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā.
已對照

又猶如農夫耕了田,解下耕牛,讓它們朝向牧草,坐在樹蔭下休息;這時他的那些耕牛急速地進入林中。凡是熟練的農夫,想再捉住它們套上[軛],並不跟隨它們的足跡在林中游走,而是拿著韁繩與刺棒,徑直前往它們下水的渡口,坐下或躺下;於是那些牛在白天吃草之後,下到渡口,洗浴、飲水,又上岸站著,他見了,便用韁繩繫住,用刺棒刺著牽回來,套上[軛],再做工作。同樣,那比丘不應在平常所觸之處以外尋找那些入出息,而應拿著唸的韁繩與慧的刺棒,把心安置在平常所觸之處而轉起作意。因為他這樣作意時,不久那些[入出息]便現起,猶如牛在下水的渡口[現身]。然後他應以唸的韁繩繫住,就在那個處所套上[軛],以慧的刺棒刺著,一再勤修業處。

Yathā pana kassako kasiṃ kasitvā balībadde muñcitvā gocaramukhe katvā chāyāya nisinno vissameyya, athassa te balībaddā vegena aṭaviṃ paviseyyuṃ. Yo hoti cheko kassako, so puna te gahetvā yojetukāmo na tesaṃ anupadaṃ gantvā aṭaviṃ āhiṇḍahi, atha kho rasmiñca patodañca gahetvā ujukameva tesaṃ nipātanatitthaṃ gantvā nisīdati vā nipajjati vā, atha te goṇe divasabhāgaṃ caritvā nipātanatitthaṃ otaritvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paccuttaritvā ṭhite disvā rasmiyā bandhitvā patodena vijjhanto ānetvā yojetvā puna kammaṃ karoti, evameva tena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā. Satirasmiṃ pana paññāpatodañca gahetvā pakatiphuṭṭhokāse cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evañhissa manasikaroto na cirasseva te upaṭṭhahanti nipātanatitthe viya goṇā. Tatonena satirasmiyā bandhitvā tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā paññāpatodena vijjhantena punappunaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ.
231已對照

二百三十一、他這樣勤修時,不久相便現起。而這[相]並不是對一切人都一樣的;有些人說:它對有些人生起樂觸,如木棉絮、如棉絮、如風流一般現起。

231. Tassevamanuyuñjato na cirasseva nimittaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ panetaṃ na sabbesaṃ ekasadisaṃ hoti. Apica kho kassaci sukhasamphassaṃ uppādayamāno tūlapicu viya kappāsapicu viya vātadhārā viya ca upaṭṭhātīti ekacce āhu.
緬 1.277已對照

然而這是諸義注中的抉擇:這[相]對有些人如星形、如摩尼珠、如珍珠而現起;對有些人成為粗觸,如棉籽、如心材的針而現起;對有些人如長的瓔珞線、如花環、如煙柱而現起;對有些人如展開的蛛絲、如雲層、如蓮花、如車輪、如月輪、如日輪而現起。而這就猶如眾多比丘誦習一部經後坐著,當一位比丘說「這經對你們現起為怎樣的呢」時,一位說:「對我,它像一條大的山中河流而現起。」另一位[說]:「對我,像一片林帶。」又一位[說]:「對我,像一棵樹蔭清涼、枝條具足、果實累累的樹。」因為對他們而言,同一部經由於想的種種不同而種種地現起。同樣,同一業處由於想的種種不同而種種地現起。因為這[相]是由想所生、以想為因緣、以想為源頭的。因此,應知「由於想的種種不同而種種地現起」。

Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāsu vinicchayo, idañhi kassaci tārakarūpaṃ viya maṇiguḷikā viya muttāguḷikā viya ca, kassaci kharasamphassaṃ hutvā kappāsaṭṭhi viya dārusārasūci viya ca, kassaci dīghapāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya kusumadāmaṃ viya dhūmasikhā viya ca, kassaci vitthataṃ makkaṭakasuttaṃ viya valāhakapaṭalaṃ viya padumapupphaṃ viya rathacakkaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ viya sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ viya ca upaṭṭhāti. Tañca panetaṃ yathā sambahulesu bhikkhūsu suttantaṃ sajjhāyitvā nisinnesu ekena bhikkhunā ‘‘tumhākaṃ kīdisaṃ hutvā idaṃ suttaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti vutte eko ‘‘mayhaṃ mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viya hutvā upaṭṭhātī’’ti āha. Aparo ‘‘mayhaṃ ekā vanarāji viya’’. Añño ‘‘mayhaṃ eko sītacchāyo sākhāsampanno phalabhārabharitarukkho viyā’’ti. Tesaṃ hi taṃ ekameva suttaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ ekameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Saññajañhi etaṃ saññānidānaṃ saññāpabhavaṃ. Tasmā saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhātīti veditabbaṃ.
已對照

而此中,以入息為所緣的心是一個,以出息為所緣的是另一個,以相為所緣的又是另一個。因為凡沒有這三法者,他的業處既達不到安止,也達不到近行;而凡有這三法者,唯他的業處達到近行與安止。因為這已被說過——

Ettha ca aññameva assāsārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ, aññaṃ passāsārammaṇaṃ, aññaṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ. Yassa hi ime tayo dhammā natthi, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ neva appanaṃ, na upacāraṃ pāpuṇāti. Yassa pana ime tayo dhammā atthi, tasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ upacārañca appanañca pāpuṇāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
已對照

「相、入息、出息,不是一心的所緣;

‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa;
已對照

不知這三法者,修習不可得。

Ajānato tayo dhamme, bhāvanā nupalabbhati.
已對照

「相、入息、出息,不是一心的所緣;

‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa;
已對照

唯知這三法者,修習才可得。」(《波羅夷義注》2.165)

Jānatova tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
232已對照

二百三十二、而相這樣現起時,那比丘應前往阿闍梨之處報告:「尊者,我這裡現起了這樣的[相]。」而阿闍梨不應說「這是相」,也不應說「這不是相」;應說「賢友,是會這樣的」,然後對他說:「你要一再作意。」因為若說「[這]是相」,他可能會陷於止息;若說「不是相」,他可能會失望而沮喪。因此,兩者都不說,只應勉勵他於作意。——長部誦者們暫且如是[說]。

232. Evaṃ upaṭṭhite pana nimitte tena bhikkhunā ācariyassa santikaṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ, bhante, evarūpaṃ nāma upaṭṭhātī’’ti. Ācariyena pana etaṃ nimittanti vā na vā nimittanti na vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ hoti, āvuso’’ti vatvā punappunaṃ manasi karohīti vattabbo. Nimittanti hi vutte vosānaṃ āpajjeyya. Na nimittanti vutte nirāso visīdeyya. Tasmā tadubhayampi avatvā manasikāreyeva niyojetabboti. Evaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakā.
緬 1.278已對照

而中部誦者們說:「應對他說『賢友,這是相;善士,你要對業處一再作意』。」然後他應把心就安置在相上。如是,從此以後,他的修習是依安置而[進行]的。因為這已由古師們說過——

Majjhimabhāṇakā panāhu ‘‘nimittamidaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ punappunaṃ manasi karohi sappurisāti vattabbo’’ti. Athānena nimitteyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Evamassāyaṃ ito pabhuti ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
已對照

「把心安置在相上,令種種行相消隱,

‘‘Nimitte ṭhapayaṃ cittaṃ, nānākāraṃ vibhāvayaṃ;
已對照

堅固者於入出息繫縛自己的心。」(《波羅夷義注》2.165)

Dhīro assāsapassāse, sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
已對照

如是從相現起時起,他的諸蓋便已被鎮伏,諸煩惱已經沉寂,念已現起,心已以近行定而得定。這時,他既不應從顏色作意那相,也不應依[其]相(lakkhaṇa)省察[它];而應猶如剎帝利王后[守護]轉輪王的胎,猶如農夫[守護]稻麥的穗胎一般,避開住處等七不適宜,親近那七適宜,好好守護[它]。然後這樣守護它之後,依一再作意使[它]達到增長、增廣,應成就十種安止善巧,應結合精進的平等。他這樣努力時,依地遍中所說的次第,在那相上便生起四種法與五種法的諸禪。

Tassevaṃ nimittupaṭṭhānato pabhuti nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti, kilesā sannisinnāva. Sati upaṭṭhitāyeva. Cittaṃ upacārasamādhinā samāhitameva. Athānena taṃ nimittaṃ neva vaṇṇato manasi kātabbaṃ, na lakkhaṇato paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Apica kho khattiyamahesiyā cakkavattigabbho viya kassakena sāliyavagabbho viya ca āvāsādīni satta asappāyāni vajjetvā tāneva satta sappāyāni sevantena sādhukaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ. Atha naṃ evaṃ rakkhitvā punappunaṃ manasikāravasena vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ gamayitvā dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ, vīriyasamatā yojetabbā. Tassevaṃ ghaṭentassa pathavīkasiṇe vuttānukkameneva tasmiṃ nimitte catukkapañcakajjhānāni nibbattanti.
233已對照

二百三十三、而於此[身隨觀]中,已生起四種法與五種法之禪的比丘,想要依觀察與還轉增長業處而達到遍淨,便把那禪以五種行相令得自在、令純熟,辨定名色,建立觀。怎樣呢?他從等至出起之後,見到入出息的集起是所生身(karajakāya)與心。因為猶如鐵匠的風箱鼓動時,依皮囊與人相應的努力而有風流動;同樣,依身與心而有入出息。然後,他把入出息與身辨定為「色」,把心與相應諸法辨定為「非色」。這是此中的略說;而名色差別的詳說,將在後文顯明。

233. Evaṃ nibbattacatukkapañcakajjhāno panettha bhikkhu sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetvā pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmo tadeva jhānaṃ pañcahākārehi vasippattaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti. Kathaṃ? So hi samāpattito vuṭṭhāya assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayo karajakāyo ca cittañcāti passati. Yathā hi kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya bhastañca purisassa ca tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto sañcarati, evameva kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsāti. Tato assāsapassāse ca kāyañca rūpanti cittañca taṃsampayuttadhamme ca arūpanti vavatthapeti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ parato āvibhavissati.
緬 1.279已對照

如是辨定名色之後,他尋求它的緣;尋求時見到它,便於三時中關於名色的轉起而度疑。已度疑者,依聚思擇安立三相,舍斷在生滅隨觀的前分所生起的光明等十種觀的隨煩惱,辨定「離隨煩惱的行道智是道」,捨棄生,達到壞滅隨觀;由於不斷的壞滅隨觀,對顯現為滅去的一切行厭離、離貪、解脫,依次第證得四聖道,住立於阿羅漢果,到達十九種省察智的終極,成為連同諸天的世間之最上的應奉施者。

Evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesati. Pariyesanto ca naṃ disvā tīsupi addhāsu nāmarūpassa pavattiṃ ārabbha kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Vitiṇṇakaṅkho kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne obhāsādayo dasa vipassanupakkilese pahāya upakkilesavimuttaṃ paṭipadāñāṇaṃ maggoti vavatthapetvā udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅgānupassanaṃ patvā nirantaraṃ bhaṅgānupassanena vayato upaṭṭhitesu sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbindanto virajjanto vimuccanto yathākkamena cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhāya ekūnavīsatibhedassa paccavekkhaṇāñāṇassa pariyantaṃ patto sadevakassa lokassa aggadakkhiṇeyyo hoti.
已對照

至此,他從計數開始、以觀為終點的入出息念定的修習便圓滿了——這是從一切行相而作的第一四法組的釋義。

Ettāvatā cassa gaṇanaṃ ādiṃ katvā vipassanāpariyosānā ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā samattā hotīti ayaṃ sabbākārato paṭhamacatukkavaṇṇanā.
234已對照

二百三十四、而於其餘三個四法組中,由於沒有另外的業處修習之法,因此,它們的義應只依逐句釋義的方法如是了知。

234. Itaresu pana tīsu catukkesu yasmā visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthi. Tasmā anupadavaṇṇanānayeneva tesaṃ evaṃ attho veditabbo.
已對照

「覺知喜(pītipaṭisaṃvedī)」者:即他學:「我將使喜被覺知、使[喜]明顯而入息、出息。」此中,以兩種行相,喜被覺知:依所緣,及依無痴。

Pītipaṭisaṃvedīti pītiṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇato ca asammohato ca.
已對照

如何依所緣而喜被覺知?他入有喜的兩種禪;在入定的剎那,由於獲得禪,喜依所緣而為他所覺知,因為所緣已被覺知。如何依無痴?入有喜的兩種禪,出[定]之後,對與禪相應的喜依盡、依滅去而思擇;在觀的剎那,由於通達相,喜依無痴而為他所覺知。因為這已在《無礙解道》中說過(《無礙解道》1.172)——

Kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati. Tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhena ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti, ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Kathaṃ asammohato? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati. Tassa vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.172) –
緬 1.280已對照

「以長入息,了知心一境性、不散亂者,念已現起;以那念、以那智,那喜被覺知。以長出息……以短入息……以短出息……以覺知全身的入出息……以令身行止息的入出息,了知心一境性、不散亂者,念已現起;以那念、以那智,那喜被覺知。轉向者,那喜被覺知;知者、見者、省察者、決意心者、以信勝解者、策勵精進者、令念現起者、令心得定者、以慧了知者,[證知]應證知的、[遍知]應遍知的、[舍斷]應舍斷的、[修習]應修習的、作證應作證的[法]者,那喜被覺知。如是,那喜被覺知。」

‘‘Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena… rassaṃ assāsavasena… rassaṃ passāsavasena… sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assāsapassāsavasena… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assāsapassāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Āvajjato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Jānato passato paccavekkhato cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahato saddhāya adhimuccato vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato satiṃ upaṭṭhāpayato cittaṃ samādahato paññāya pajānato abhiññeyyaṃ pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikaroto sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Evaṃ sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti.
已對照

依這同一方式,其餘諸句也應依義而知。而此中只有這一點差別:應知覺知樂是依三種禪,覺知心行是依全部四種[禪]。「心行(cittasaṅkhāro)」者:即受等兩蘊。又此中於「覺知樂」一句,為顯示觀之地,在《無礙解道》(《無礙解道》1.173)中說了「『樂』者:兩種樂,即身的樂與心的樂」。「令心行止息(passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ)」者:即令一一粗的心行止息、令[它]滅,此是其義。它應依身行中所說的方式詳細地了知。

Eteneva nayena avasesapadānipi atthato veditabbāni. Idampanettha visesamattaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena sukhapaṭisaṃveditā, catunnampi vasena cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā. Cittasaṅkhāroti vedanādayo dve khandhā. Sukhapaṭisaṃvedīpade cettha vipassanābhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhāni kāyikañca sukhaṃ cetasikañcā’’ti paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.173) vuttaṃ. Passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāranti oḷārikaṃ oḷārikaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento, nirodhentoti attho. So vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
已對照

此外,此中於喜句,以喜為標目而說受;於樂句,則以自身之形[說]受。在心行兩句中,依「想與受是心所,這些法系屬於心,是心行」(《無礙解道》1.174;《中部》1.463)之語,[說的是]與想相應的受。如是,應知這四法組是依受隨觀的方式而說的。

Apicettha pītipade pītisīsena vedanā vuttā. Sukhapade sarūpeneva vedanā. Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesu ‘‘saññā ca vedanā ca cetasikā ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā cittasaṅkhārā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.174; ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato saññāsampayuttā vedanāti evaṃ vedanānupassanānayena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
235已對照

二百三十五、於第三四法組中,也應知覺知心是依四種禪。「令心喜悅(abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ)」者:即他學:「我將令心歡喜、愉悅、歡笑、大笑而入息、出息。」此中,以兩種行相而有喜悅:依定,及依觀。

235. Tatiyacatukkepi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā. Abhippamodayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ modento pamodento hāsento pahāsento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi abhippamodo hoti samādhivasena ca vipassanāvasena ca.
緬 1.281已對照

如何依定?他入有喜的兩種禪;他在入定的剎那,以相應的喜令心歡喜、令[心]愉悅。如何依觀?入有喜的兩種禪,出[定]之後,對與禪相應的喜依盡、依滅去而思擇;如是,在觀的剎那,以與禪相應的喜為所緣,令心歡喜、令[心]愉悅。如是行道者,稱為「他學:『我將令心喜悅而入息、出息。』」

Kathaṃ samādhivasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati. So samāpattikkhaṇe sampayuttapītiyā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Kathaṃ vipassanāvasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttapītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati. Evaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Evaṃ paṭipanno ‘‘abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
已對照

「令心得定(samādahaṃ cittaṃ)」者:即依初禪等,把心平正地置於所緣、平正地安置。或者,入那些禪,出[定]之後,對與禪相應的心依盡、依滅去而正觀者,在觀的剎那,由於通達相,生起剎那心一境性。依如是生起的剎那心一境性,也把心平正地置於所緣、平正地安置者,稱為「他學:『我將令心得定而入息、出息。』」

Samādahaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānādivasena ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento. Tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ khayato vayato sampassato vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena uppajjati khaṇikacittekaggatā. Evaṃ uppannāya khaṇikacittekaggatāya vasenapi ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘samādahaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
已對照

「令心解脫(vimocayaṃ cittaṃ)」者:即以初禪令心從諸蓋脫出、解脫,以第二[禪]從尋、伺,以第三[禪]從喜,以第四[禪]從樂與苦令心脫出、解脫。或者,入那些禪,出[定]之後,對與禪相應的心依盡、依滅去而思擇。他在觀的剎那,以無常隨觀令心從常想脫出,以苦隨觀從樂想,以無我隨觀從我想,以厭離隨觀從歡喜,以離貪隨觀從貪,以滅隨觀從集起,以舍離隨觀從執取令心脫出,而入息、出息。因此稱為「他學:『我將令心解脫而入息、出息。』」如是,應知這四法組是依心隨觀而說的。

Vimocayaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dutiyena vitakkavicārehi, tatiyena pītiyā, catutthena sukhadukkhehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento. Tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ khayato vayato sammasati. So vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññāto, anattānupassanāya attasaññāto, nibbidānupassanāya nandito, virāgānupassanāya rāgato, nirodhānupassanāya samudayato, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento assasati ceva passasati ca. Tena vuccati ‘‘vimocayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti. Evaṃ cittānupassanāvasena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
236已對照

二百三十六、而於第四四法組中,「隨觀無常者(aniccānupassī)」這裡,首先應知無常,應知無常性,應知無常隨觀,應知隨觀無常者。

236. Catutthacatukke pana aniccānupassīti ettha tāva aniccaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aniccatā veditabbā. Aniccānupassanā veditabbā. Aniccānupassī veditabbo.
緬 1.282已對照

此中,「無常」者:即五蘊。為什麼呢?因為[它們]有生、滅去、變異。「無常性」者:即它們的生、滅去、變異;或者是有而後無;義即已生起的[諸法]不以那同一行相而住,以剎那壞滅而破壞。「無常隨觀」者:即依那無常性,於色等隨觀為「無常」。「隨觀無常者」,即具足那隨觀的人。因此,應知如是的人入息、出息時,於此處是「他學:『我將隨觀無常而入息、出息。』」

Tattha aniccanti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā. Aniccatāti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathattaṃ, hutvā abhāvo vā, nibbattānaṃ tenevākārena aṭṭhatvā khaṇabhaṅgena bhedoti attho. Aniccānupassanāti tassā aniccatāya vasena rūpādīsu aniccanti anupassanā. Aniccānupassīti tāya anupassanāya samannāgato. Tasmā evaṃbhūto assasanto passasanto ca idha ‘‘aniccānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
已對照

而「隨觀離貪者(virāgānupassī)」這裡,有兩種離貪:壞滅離貪與究竟離貪。此中,「壞滅離貪」者:即諸行的剎那壞滅。「究竟離貪」者:即涅槃。「離貪隨觀」者:即依見那兩者而轉起的觀與道。應知具足那兩種隨觀而入息、出息者,是「他學:『我將隨觀離貪而入息、出息。』」於「隨觀滅者(nirodhānupassī)」一句也是這個方式。

Virāgānupassīti ettha pana dve virāgā khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha khayavirāgoti saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo. Accantavirāgoti nibbānaṃ. Virāgānupassanāti tadubhayadassanavasena pavattā vipassanā ca maggo ca. Tāya duvidhāyapi anupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘virāgānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo. Nirodhānupassīpadepi eseva nayo.
已對照

「隨觀舍離者(paṭinissaggānupassī)」這裡,也有兩種舍離:捨棄舍離與躍入舍離。舍離本身即是隨觀,[故為]「舍離隨觀」;這是觀與道的名稱。

Paṭinissaggānupassīti etthāpi dve paṭinissaggā pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ca pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo ca. Paṭinissaggoyeva anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Vipassanāmaggānaṃ etamadhivacanaṃ.
已對照

因為觀依彼分,把諸煩惱連同諸蘊與行作一起捨棄;又由於見有為的過患,以傾向於那[涅槃]而躍入與之相反的涅槃,所以稱為「捨棄舍離」,也稱為「躍入舍離」。道依正斷,把諸煩惱連同諸蘊與行作一起捨棄;又以[涅槃]為所緣而躍入涅槃,所以稱為「捨棄舍離」,也稱為「躍入舍離」。而兩者都由於隨著前前之智而一再觀察,故稱為「隨觀」。應知具足那兩種舍離隨觀而入息、出息者,是「他學:『我將隨觀舍離而入息、出息。』」

Vipassanā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggoti ca vuccati. Maggo samucchedavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, ārammaṇakaraṇena ca nibbāne pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggoti ca vuccati. Ubhayampi pana purimapurimaññāṇānaṃ anuanupassanato anupassanāti vuccati. Tāya duvidhāyapi paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
已對照

這第四四法組唯依純觀而說;而前三[四法組]則依止與觀[而說]。如是,應依四個四法組了知具十六事的入出息唸的修習。又如是依十六事,這入出息念有大果、大功德。

Idaṃ catutthacatukkaṃ suddhavipassanāvaseneva vuttaṃ. Purimāni pana tīṇi samathavipassanāvasena. Evaṃ catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasavatthukāya ānāpānassatiyā bhāvanā veditabbā. Evaṃ soḷasavatthuvasena ca pana ayaṃ ānāpānassati mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsā.
237緬 1.283已對照

二百三十七、此中,依「諸比丘,這入出息念定也[是這樣]:若修習、多作,正是寂靜的、殊勝的」等語,應知它也依寂靜性等而有大功德,也依能斷除尋而[有大功德]。因為由於是寂靜、殊勝、無澆灌的樂住,它截斷心依那些作定之障礙的尋而此處彼處的奔馳,使心唯朝向入出息所緣。正因此而說:「為了斷除尋,應修習入出息念。」(《增支部》9.1)

237. Tatrassa ‘‘ayampi kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi bhāvito bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto cā’’tiādivacanato santabhāvādivasenāpi mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā, vitakkupacchedasamatthatāyapi. Ayañhi santapaṇītaasecanakasukhavihārattā samādhiantarāyakarānaṃ vitakkānaṃ vasena ito cito ca cittassa vidhāvanaṃ vicchinditvā ānāpānārammaṇābhimukhameva cittaṃ karoti. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1).
已對照

又應知它也依作為明與解脫之圓滿的根本而有大功德。因為這已由世尊說過:「諸比丘,入出息念若修習、多作,能圓滿四念處;四念處若修習、多作,能圓滿七覺支;七覺支若修習、多作,能圓滿明與解脫。」(《中部》3.147)

Vijjāvimuttipāripūriyā mūlabhāvenāpi cassā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘ānāpānassati, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti, satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiṃ paripūrentī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.147).
已對照

此外,應知它也依令最後的入出息被知而有大功德。因為這已由世尊說過:「羅睺羅,入出息念如是修習、如是多作時,即使是那些最後的入出息,也是被知而滅,不是不被知[而滅]。」(《中部》2.121)

Apica carimakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ viditabhāvakaraṇatopissā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘evaṃ bhāvitāya kho, rāhula, ānāpānassatiyā evaṃ bahulīkatāya yepi te carimakā assāsapassāsā, tepi viditāva nirujjhanti, no aviditā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.121).
238緬 1.284已對照

二百三十八、此中,依滅而言,有三種最後的[入出息]:有最後的、禪最後的、死最後的。因為在諸有之中,入出息在欲有中轉起,在色有、無色有中不轉起,所以它們是有最後的。在諸禪之中,在前三禪中轉起,在第四[禪]中不轉起,所以它們是禪最後的。而那些與死心之前的第十六心一同生起、與死心一同滅的,這些名為死最後的。此處以「最後的」所意指的,就是這些。

相傳,勤修這業處的比丘,由於善於把握入出息所緣,在死心之前第十六心的生起剎那轉向生時,它們的生也明顯;轉向住時,它們的住也明顯;轉向壞時,它們的壞也明顯。

因為修習這以外的其他業處而證得阿羅漢的比丘,其壽命的期限或已限定,或未限定;而修習這具十六事的入出息念而證得阿羅漢者,壽命的期限必已限定。他知道「現在我的壽行將轉起這麼久,不會超過這個」,便隨自己的本意,做完照料身體、穿[下衣]、披[上衣]等一切事務,然後閉上眼睛——猶如住拘吒山寺的帝須長老(Koṭapabbatavihāravāsī Tissatthera)、住大迦蘭吉耶寺的大帝須長老(Mahākarañjiyavihāravāsī Mahātissatthera)、住天子大國的常乞食帝須長老(Devaputtamahāraṭṭha Piṇḍapātikatissatthera),以及住質多羅山寺的兩兄弟長老(Cittalapabbatavihāravāsino dve Bhātiyattherā)那樣。

此中[以]一則故事來闡明。相傳,兩兄弟長老中的一位,在滿月布薩日誦畢波羅提木叉之後,由比丘僧團圍繞著前往自己的住處,站在經行處望著月光,考量自己的壽行之後,對比丘僧團說:「你們從前見過比丘是怎樣般涅槃的?」其中有些人說:「我們從前見過就坐在座位上般涅槃的。」有些人[說]:「我們[見過]在空中結跏趺而坐的。」長老說:「現在我要讓你們看看我就在經行中般涅槃。」於是在經行處畫了一條線,說:「我從這經行處的一端走到另一端,回來時一到這條線就般涅槃。」說完,下到經行處,走到另一端,回來時,就在一隻腳踏上那條線的剎那般涅槃了。

因此,智者確應不放逸地

常常勤修這樣有眾多功德利益的入出息念。

這是關於入出息唸的詳說之門。

238. Tattha nirodhavasena tayo carimakā bhavacarimakā, jhānacarimakā, cuticarimakāti. Bhavesu hi kāmabhave assāsapassāsā pavattanti, rūpārūpabhavesu nappavattanti, tasmā te bhavacarimakā. Jhānesu purime jhānattaye pavattanti, catutthe nappavattanti, tasmā te jhānacarimakā. Ye pana cuticittassa purato soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvā cuticittena saha nirujjhanti, ime cuticarimakā nāma. Ime idha ‘‘carimakā’’ti adhippetā.
Imaṃ kira kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttassa bhikkhuno ānāpānārammaṇassa suṭṭhu pariggahitattā cuticittassa purato soḷasamassa cittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppādaṃ āvajjayato uppādopi nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti. Ṭhitiṃ āvajjayato ṭhitipi nesaṃ pākaṭā hoti. Bhaṅgaṃ āvajjayato ca bhaṅgo nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti.
Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pattassa bhikkhuno hi āyuantaraṃ paricchinnaṃ vā hoti aparicchinnaṃ vā. Idaṃ pana soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatiṃ bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pattassa āyuantaraṃ paricchinnameva hoti. So ‘‘ettakaṃ dāni me āyusaṅkhārā pavattissanti, na ito para’’nti ñatvā attano dhammatāya eva sarīrapaṭijaggananivāsanapārupanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā akkhīni nimīleti koṭapabbatavihāravāsītissatthero viya mahākarañjiyavihāravāsīmahātissatthero viya devaputtamahāraṭṭhe piṇḍapātikatissatthero viya cittalapabbatavihāravāsino dve bhātiyattherā viya ca.
Tatridaṃ ekavatthuparidīpanaṃ. Dvebhātiyattherānaṃ kireko puṇṇamuposathadivase pātimokkhaṃ osāretvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā caṅkame ṭhito candālokaṃ oloketvā attano āyusaṅkhāre upadhāretvā bhikkhusaṅghamāha – ‘‘tumhehi kathaṃ parinibbāyantā bhikkhū diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Tatra keci āhaṃsu ‘‘amhehi āsane nisinnakāva parinibbāyantā diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Keci ‘‘amhehi ākāse pallaṅkamābhujitvā nisinnakā’’ti. Thero āha – ‘‘ahaṃ dāni vo caṅkamantameva parinibbāyamānaṃ dassessāmī’’ti tato caṅkame lekhaṃ katvā ‘‘ahaṃ ito caṅkamakoṭito parakoṭiṃ gantvā nivattamāno imaṃ lekhaṃ patvāva parinibbāyissāmī’’ti vatvā caṅkamaṃ oruyha parabhāgaṃ gantvā nivattamāno ekena pādena lekhaṃ akkantakkhaṇeyeva parinibbāyi.
Tasmā have appamatto, anuyuñjetha paṇḍito;
Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, ānāpānassatiṃ sadāti.
Idaṃ ānāpānassatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
已對照

寂止隨念論

Upasamānussatikathā
239緬 1.285已對照

二百三十九、而想修習在入出息念之後所列出的寂止隨念者,應獨處靜坐,[思惟]「諸比丘,凡有為或無為諸法,離貪被稱為其中最上的,即:憍之破除、渴之調伏、執著之根除、輪轉之斷絕、渴愛之盡、離貪、滅、涅槃」(《增支部》4.34;《如是語》90),如是隨念稱為一切苦之寂止的涅槃的諸功德。

此中,「凡(yāvatā)」者:即有多少。「諸法(dhammā)」者:即諸自性。「有為或無為(saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā)」者:即由諸緣會集、聚合而所作的,或非所作的。「離貪被稱為其中最上的(virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyati)」者:即在那些有為、無為法之中,離貪被稱為最上的,[即]最勝的、最高的。此中,「離貪」並非唯是貪的不存在;而是以「即:憍之破除……乃至……涅槃」[所說的]——凡獲得「憍之破除」等名稱的那無為法,應理解為離貪。因為緣於它,慢憍、男子憍等一切憍都成為無憍、離憍而消亡,所以稱為「憍之破除(madanimmadano)」。又因為緣於它,一切欲渴都達到調伏、滅沒,所以稱為「渴之調伏(pipāsavinayo)」。又因為緣於它,對五欲功德的諸執著達到根除,所以稱為「執著之根除(ālayasamugghāto)」。又因為緣於它,三地輪轉被斷絕,所以稱為「輪轉之斷絕(vaṭṭupacchedo)」。又因為緣於它,渴愛完全趨於盡、被離貪、被滅,所以稱為「渴愛之盡、離貪、滅」。又因為它出離、脫離、離繫於渴愛——[渴愛]由於為了一再的存在而編織、結縛、縫綴四生、五趣、七識住與九眾生居,[故]得到「織(vāna)」之稱——所以稱為「涅槃(nibbāna)」。

如是,應依憍之破除性等這些功德,隨念稱為涅槃的寂止。或者,凡世尊在「諸比丘,我要為你們說無為……真實……彼岸……極難見……不老……堅固……無妄衍……不死……吉祥……安穩……未曾有……無災……無惱害……清淨……洲……救護……諸比丘,我要為你們說庇護」等經中(《相應部》4.366)所說的其他寂止功德,也應依它們而隨念。

當他這樣依憍之破除性等功德隨念寂止時,「那時他的心不為貪所纏縛,不為瞋……心不為痴所纏縛;那時他的心依寂止而唯是正直的」,[於是]依佛隨念等中所說的方式,已鎮伏諸蓋者,於一剎那生起諸禪支。然而,由於寂止諸功德的甚深,或由於傾心於隨念種種功德,[禪]不達到安止,唯是達到近行的禪。而這[禪]依隨念寂止的功德,便得到「寂止隨念」之名。

而這[隨念]也如六隨念一樣,唯於聖弟子成就;雖然如此,重視寂止的凡夫也應作意。因為即使依聽聞,心也對寂止生起淨信。而勤修這寂止隨唸的比丘,睡得安樂,醒得安樂,諸根寂靜,心意寂靜,具足慚愧,令人生信,勝解於殊勝,為同梵行者所尊重、所欽敬。即使未更上通達,也以善趣為歸趣。

因此,明智者確應不放逸地

修習這樣有眾多功德利益的、對聖寂止的念。

這是關於寂止隨唸的詳說之門。

239. Ānāpānassatiyā anantaraṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ pana upasamānussatiṃ bhāvetukāmena rahogatena paṭisallīnena – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyati, yadidaṃ madanimmadano pipāsavinayo ālayasamugghāto vaṭṭupacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbāna’’nti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) evaṃ sabbadukkhūpasamasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa guṇā anussaritabbā.
Tattha yāvatāti yattakā. Dhammāti sabhāvā. Saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vāti saṅgamma samāgamma paccayehi katā vā akatā vā. Virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti tesaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammānaṃ virāgo aggamakkhāyati seṭṭho uttamoti vuccati. Tattha virāgoti na rāgābhāvamattameva, atha kho yadidaṃ madanimmadano…pe… nibbānanti yo so madanimmadanotiādīni nāmāni asaṅkhatadhammo labhati, so virāgoti paccetabbo. So hi yasmā tamāgamma sabbepi mānamadapurisamadādayo madā nimmadā amadā honti vinassanti, tasmā madanimmadanoti vuccati. Yasmā ca tamāgamma sabbāpi kāmapipāsā vinayaṃ abbhatthaṃ yāti, tasmā pipāsavinayoti vuccati. Yasmā pana tamāgamma pañcakāmaguṇālayā samugghātaṃ gacchanti, tasmā ālayasamugghātoti vuccati. Yasmā ca tamāgamma tebhūmakaṃ vaṭṭaṃ upacchijjati, tasmā vaṭṭupacchedoti vuccati. Yasmā pana tamāgamma sabbaso taṇhā khayaṃ gacchati virajjati nirujjhati ca, tasmā taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodhoti vuccati. Yasmā panesa catasso yoniyo pañca gatiyo satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nava ca sattāvāse aparāparabhāvāya vinanato ābandhanato saṃsibbanato vānanti laddhavohārāya taṇhāya nikkhanto nissaṭo visaṃyutto, tasmā nibbānanti vuccatīti.
Evametesaṃ madanimmadanatādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ vasena nibbānasaṅkhāto upasamo anussaritabbo. Ye vā panaññepi bhagavatā – ‘‘asaṅkhatañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi… saccañca… pārañca… sududdasañca… ajarañca… dhuvañca… nippapañcañca… amatañca… sivañca… khemañca… abbhutañca… anītikañca… abyābajjhañca… visuddhiñca… dīpañca… tāṇañca … leṇañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.366) suttesu upasamaguṇā vuttā, tesampi vasena anussaritabboyeva.
Tassevaṃ madanimmadanatādiguṇavasena upasamaṃ anussarato neva tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosa… na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti upasamaṃ ārabbhāti buddhānussatiādīsu vuttanayeneva vikkhambhitanīvaraṇassa ekakkhaṇe jhānaṅgāni uppajjanti. Upasamaguṇānaṃ pana gambhīratāya nānappakāraguṇānussaraṇādhimuttatāya vā appanaṃ appatvā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti. Tadetamupasamaguṇānussaraṇavasena upasamānussaticceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.
Cha anussatiyo viya ca ayampi ariyasāvakasseva ijjhati, evaṃ santepi upasamagarukena puthujjanenāpi manasi kātabbā. Sutavasenāpi hi upasame cittaṃ pasīdati. Imañca pana upasamānussatiṃ anuyutto bhikkhu sukhaṃ supati, sukhaṃ paṭibujjhati, santindriyo hoti santamānaso hirottappasamannāgato pāsādiko paṇītādhimuttiko sabrahmacārīnaṃ garu ca bhāvanīyo ca. Uttari appaṭivijjhanto pana sugatiparāyano hoti.
Tasmā have appamatto, bhāvayetha vicakkhaṇo;
Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, ariye upasame satinti.
Idaṃ upasamānussatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
已對照

如是,在為令善人愉悅而造的《清淨道論》中,

Iti sādhujanapāmojjatthāya kate visuddhimagge
已對照

於定的修習之部,

Samādhibhāvanādhikāre
已對照

名為〈隨念業處的解說〉的

Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddeso nāma
已對照

第八章[終]。

Aṭṭhamo paricchedo.